JP7155181B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine capable of playing games.

In a pachinko game machine, which is an example of a game machine, a storage unit capable of storing game media supplied from a game island installed in a game hall, a payout device (payout unit) capable of paying out game media, and a guide passage forming portion that forms a guide passage for guiding the game media supplied to the storage portion to the payout portion, and the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion are attached to the game frame by screw members. (See Patent Document 1, for example).

JP-A-2003-96050

In the game machine described in Patent Document 1, the screw member for attaching the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion to the game frame and the screw member attached to the inside of the game island are disengaged, and the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion are disengaged. If the game medium falls into the part, the screw member will be mixed into the payout device together with the game medium. There was a problem that it may be paid out to

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of preventing a screw member from entering a payout portion.

The game machine of means A is
A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a starting region;
a storage section capable of storing game media;
a payout unit capable of paying out game media;
a guide passage forming portion having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage for guiding the game media in the storage portion to the payout portion;
a screw drop limiting portion provided to cover the upper side of the guide passage forming portion;
As a notification display for notifying that the amount of game media provided has reached a predetermined amount, a first notification display for notifying that a first predetermined amount has been reached and a second predetermined amount that is different from the first predetermined amount have been reached. A second notification display for notifying that, and a display means capable of displaying
A game can be played using the game medium paid out from the payout unit, and an effect can be executed based on the game medium entering the start area,
The screw drop-limiting portion prevents the game medium falling on the screw drop-limiting portion from staying and the screw member dropped on the screw drop-limiting portion to drop into the guide passage forming portion. configured to be able to stay on the restriction part,
The character used for the notification display includes a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the character is formed,
The specific character includes a character whose background image is not visible from the specific area and a character whose background image is visible,
It is characterized by
The game machine of means 1 is
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
a storage section (eg, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (eg, game ball P);
a payout unit (e.g., payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
A guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) that has an open upper surface and forms a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage or a second guide passage) that guides game media in the storage portion to the payout portion. and second guide passage forming portion 204),
a cover part (eg, first cover body 310, second cover body 320, third cover body 330) provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming part;
Display means (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5, etc.),
A predetermined limiting portion (for example, long hole 316A 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed portion 336) are provided (see FIGS. 22 and 24),
A plurality of specific restricting portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) are provided in the guiding passage forming portion for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guiding passage forming portion to the dispensing portion (see FIG. 11). , FIGS. 12 and 27),
The predetermined restricting portions (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, and recess 336) are provided so that game media that have fallen on the cover portion can fall from the cover portion without staying there. ,
The display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area surrounding the first display area and narrower than the first display area (for example, the image display device 5 the display area includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 surrounding the first display area 20SH51 and narrower than the first display area 20SH51;
The display means is
A background image corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 can display the It is possible to display a background image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state, etc.),
In the second display area, it is possible to display, in front of the background image, a given amount display related to the given amount of game value (for example, the image display device 5 can display the background image in the second display area 20SH52. It is possible to display the winning number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded balls on the front side of the image, etc.),
In at least the first display area, on the front side of the background image, a notification display for notifying that the amount of game value provided has reached a predetermined amount has reached a first predetermined amount. and a second notification display that notifies that the amount of game value provided has reached the second predetermined amount (for example, the image display device 5 can display at least the first In the 1 display area 20SH51, in the front side of the background image, the winning number notification display 20SHKH for notifying that the number of prize balls given in the big win game state has reached the number of "Kiriban" is given in the big win game state. When the number of prize balls reaches "1000", it is possible to display "1000 over" to notify the number of wins, and when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "2000", " It is possible to display the acquisition number notification display such as "over 2000"),
The awarded amount display is updated each time a gaming value is awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the acquired number display 20SHK is updated each time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in a jackpot game state). ,
The notification display ends when a specific period of time elapses after the start of display (for example, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH ends display when a predetermined period elapses after the start of display). etc),
The characters used for the notification display are characters of a size larger than the characters used for the grant amount display (for example, the characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK). size characters, etc.),
Characters used for the display of the amount to be applied and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming characters is formed (for example, characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH includes a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the character is formed, etc.),
The specific character used for the display of the amount to be applied is such that the background image cannot be visually recognized from the specific area (for example, the specific character used for the acquisition number display 20SHK is such that the background image cannot be visually recognized from the specific area. etc.), the specific characters used for the notification display have the background image visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH have the background image visible from the specific area etc.),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion. Further, it is possible to prevent the threaded member that has entered the guide passage forming portion from entering the delivery portion. In addition, since the game medium does not stay in the predetermined restricting portion and the screw member can be kept in a state where it can always stay, the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion is prevented from falling into the guide passage forming portion. can do. In addition, the display including the specific characters can be preferably displayed in relation to the background image.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include an invention relating to a game machine of means 2 below. Conventionally, in a game machine, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-17403, a given amount display regarding a given amount of game value given in an advantageous state advantageous to a player and a game value given are displayed. In some cases, it is possible to display a notification display for notifying that the amount has reached a predetermined amount. In such a game machine, for example, in various displays such as display of amount to be awarded and notification display, specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming characters is formed are used. Background images corresponding to various states are displayed, but there is room for improvement in the relationship between such specific characters and the background image. There is a need to provide a gaming machine that can display

The game machine of means 2 is
A game machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 can be controlled in a jackpot game state, etc.),
Display means (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5, etc.),
The display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area surrounding the first display area and narrower than the first display area (for example, the image display device 5 the display area includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 surrounding the first display area 20SH51 and narrower than the first display area 20SH51;
The display means is
A background image corresponding to the advantageous state can be displayed in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 can display the It is possible to display a background image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state, etc.),
In the second display area, it is possible to display, in front of the background image, a given amount display related to the given amount of game value (for example, the image display device 5 can display the background image in the second display area 20SH52. It is possible to display the winning number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded balls on the front side of the image, etc.),
In at least the first display area, on the front side of the background image, a notification display for notifying that the amount of game value provided has reached a predetermined amount has reached a first predetermined amount. and a second notification display that notifies that the amount of game value provided has reached the second predetermined amount (for example, the image display device 5 can display at least the first In the 1 display area 20SH51, in the front side of the background image, the winning number notification display 20SHKH for notifying that the number of prize balls given in the big win game state has reached the number of "Kiriban" is given in the big win game state. When the number of prize balls reaches "1000", it is possible to display "1000 over" to notify the number of wins, and when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches "2000", " It is possible to display the acquisition number notification display such as "over 2000"),
The awarded amount display is updated each time a gaming value is awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the acquired number display 20SHK is updated each time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in a jackpot game state). ,
The notification display ends when a specific period of time elapses after the start of display (for example, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH ends display when a predetermined period elapses after the start of display). etc),
The characters used for the notification display are characters of a size larger than the characters used for the grant amount display (for example, the characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK). size characters, etc.),
Characters used for the display of the amount to be applied and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming characters is formed (for example, characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH includes a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the character is formed, etc.),
The specific character used for the display of the amount to be applied is such that the background image cannot be visually recognized from the specific area (for example, the specific character used for the acquisition number display 20SHK is such that the background image cannot be visually recognized from the specific area. etc.), the specific characters used for the notification display have the background image visible from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH have the background image visible from the specific area etc.),
It is characterized by
According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably display the display including the specific characters in relation to the background image.

The present invention may include only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may include the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention together with the matters specifying the invention other than the matters specifying the invention. It may have.

It is a front view showing a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of the pachinko game machine. It is a rear view showing a pachinko game machine. It is a left side view showing the pachinko game machine. FIG. 4 is a plan view showing a frame for a game machine to which a game board is attached; It is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko game machine is seen from diagonally behind. It is a perspective view showing a state in which the game board is removed from the game machine frame. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing a mounting structure of the passage forming body to the game machine frame; It is an enlarged rear view showing the rear upper part of the frame for gaming machines. (A) is a plan view showing the first passage forming body, and (B) is a rear view showing the first passage forming body. (A) is a sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 10A, (B) is a sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 10A, and (C) is a sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. 10A. (A) is a plan view showing a first guide passage forming portion, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the first cover body, (B) is an EE cross-sectional view of (A), and (C) is an FF cross-sectional view of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the second cover body, (B) is a GG sectional view of (A), and (C) is a HH sectional view of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the third cover body, (B) is a cross-sectional view along II of (A), (C) is a cross-sectional view along JJ of (A), and (D) is a third cover body. and (E) is a perspective view showing a ball stopper member. (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the first guide passage forming portion showing the state in which the ball stopper member is in the first state, and (B) is a first guide passage forming portion showing the state in which the ball stopper member is in the second state. It is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the. (A) is a perspective view showing a board mounting frame to which a terminal board is mounted, (B) is a KK section of (A), and (C) is a LL section of (B). It is the perspective view which shows the state which looked at the circumference|surroundings of the ball|bowl tank part in the back surface of the game frame from diagonally behind. (A) is a plan view showing the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back of the game frame, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM of (A). It is the perspective view which shows the state which looked at the periphery of the 1st guide passage formation part in the back surface of a game frame from diagonally behind. It is a top view which shows the periphery of the 1st guide passage formation part in the back surface of a game frame. 21. (A) is a sectional view taken along line NN of FIG. 21, (B) is a view showing a rotating state of the screw member, and (C) is a sectional view taken along line OO of FIG. (A) is a cross-sectional view along PP in FIG. 21, and (B) is a cross-sectional view along QQ in FIG. FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view taken along line RR of FIG. 21; FIG. 22 is a cross-sectional view taken along line SS of FIG. 21; (A) is the retention state of the screw member when the ball stopper is in the first state, (B) is a TT sectional view of (A), and (C) is the ball stopper when the ball stopper is in the second state. FIG. 10D is a UU cross-sectional view of FIG. 1C, showing a retained state of the screw member; It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the 1st guide passage formation part which shows the movement condition of a screw member. It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide path forming portion showing the movement state of the game ball on the cover portion. (A) is a schematic rear view showing a cover portion as a modification, and (B) is a schematic rear view showing a state in which cables are wired so as to cross the cover portion. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the gaming machine in the characteristic part 053SG. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the state by which the input circuit and the output circuit were mounted in the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data bus formed in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern branched from the data bus in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the ground area|region formed in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the ground area|region formed in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a circuit diagram showing a connection mode of low-voltage components and high-voltage components mounted on the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the connector mounted in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a diagram showing a wiring pattern around the connector formed on the solder surface of the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the state where the game control board in Example 1 was accommodated in the board case. It is a circuit diagram related to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern for the power supply formed in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the wiring pattern formed in the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1, and the wiring pattern for power supply formed in the soldering surface. It is a figure which shows an example of the situation where the game control board in Example 1 was attached to the game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the situation where the game control board in Example 1 was attached to the game machine. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in connection with the connection of the microcomputer for game control, an input circuit, and an output circuit in the soldering surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in connection with the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2 in connection with the microcomputer for game control, an input circuit, and an output circuit. It is a circuit diagram related to the connection between the game control microcomputer and the input circuit and the output circuit in the game control board in the second embodiment. It is a perspective view showing the structure of the specific electronic component mounted on the game control board in Example 3, (A) is a perspective view from above the specific electronic component, (B) is a lower side of the specific electronic component 1 is a perspective view from . It is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which a specific electronic component is soldered to the game control board in Example 3. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure which shows the lighting example of a game effect lamp. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during jackpot opening. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processing; It is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big winning opening, the timing of various displays, and the like. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; It is a diagram showing an example of a state in which the game ball is sandwiched between the special variable winning ball device. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; It is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big winning opening, the timing of various displays, and the like. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display on the image display device, an open/closed state of the big prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of effect display; It is a figure which shows the background art relevant to the 1st form of the characteristic part 20SH. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for displaying the number of acquisitions and the like in the first form of the characterizing portion 20SH. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing how the acquired number display in the first form of the characterizing portion 20SH looks. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of effect operation of acquisition number display and acquisition number notification display in the first form of the characterizing part 20SH; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characterizing portion 20SH. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a first modification of the display mode of Arabic numerals used for display of the number of acquisitions in the second form of the characterizing portion 20SH. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a second modification of the display mode of Arabic numerals used for display of the number of acquisitions in the second form of the characterizing portion 20SH. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for result display in the third form of the characterizing portion 20SH; It is a figure which shows an example of the production period of various production|presentations in the jackpot game state in the 3rd form of characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of various production|presentations in the jackpot game state in the 3rd form of characteristic part 20SH. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of setting suggestion by the ending background image in the third form of the characteristic portion 20SH; It is a figure which shows the background art relevant to the 4th form of the characteristic part 20SH. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for displaying the remaining number of times in the fourth form of the characterizing portion 20SH. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for the remaining number of times notification display in the fourth form of the characterizing portion 20SH; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing how the remaining number of times display in the fourth form of the characterizing portion 20SH looks. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the relationship between the variable display and the change in the display mode of the remaining count notification display in the fourth form of the characterizing portion 20SH; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of the remaining count display and the remaining count notification display in the 1st form of the characteristic part 20SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation operation|movement when winning generate|occur|produces during the round in the characteristic part 19SH. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed in the characteristic portion 19SH; It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation operation|movement when over winning a prize in the characteristic part 19SH generate|occur|produces. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed in the characteristic portion 19SH; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of setting suggestion by over winning effects in the characteristic portion 19SH. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation operation|movement in case there exist the round which did not win a predetermined number in the characteristic part 19SH, and the round in which over winning occurred. It is a figure which shows the other example of production|presentation operation|movement in case there exist the round which did not win a predetermined number in the characteristic part 19SH, and the round in which over winning occurred.

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

(form)
The game machine of form 1 is
a storage section (eg, ball tank forming section 201) capable of storing game media (eg, game ball P);
a payout unit (for example, payout device 200) capable of paying out game media;
A guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) that has an open upper surface and forms a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage or a second guide passage) that guides game media in the storage portion to the payout portion. and second guide passage forming portion 204),
It is characterized by having

The gaming machine of form 2 is the gaming machine according to form 1,
A cover portion (for example, the cover portion 314 of the first cover body 310, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320, the cover portion of the third cover body 330) provided to partially cover the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion 334),
The cover restricts screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16) dropped on the cover from falling to the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202). Predetermined restricting portions (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, and recesses 336) are provided (see FIGS. 22 and 24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 3 is the gaming machine according to form 2,
The predetermined restricting portions (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recess 336) are provided so that game media that have fallen on the cover portion can fall from the cover portion without staying there. It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the game medium does not stay in the predetermined restricting portion and the screw member can always be kept in a state of being able to stay, the screw member dropped onto the cover portion falls into the guide passage forming portion. can be prevented.

The gaming machine of form 4 is the gaming machine according to form 2 or 3,
The predetermined restricting portion has a first retention portion (eg, long hole 316A) capable of retaining the screw members (eg, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) dropped on the cover portion. ~ 316C) and a second retention portion (eg, grooves 326A to 326C),
The second retention section is provided at a position closer to the dispensing section (for example, dispensing device 200) than the first retention section, and is larger than the first retention section (L22B>L21).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member is more likely to be retained in the retaining portion as the dispensing portion is approached, so that it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from moving and falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 4,
The dispensing portion (eg, dispensing device) of the screw members (eg, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) dropped into the guiding passage forming portion (eg, the first guiding passage forming portion 202) 200) are provided with a plurality of specific restriction portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) (see FIGS. 12 and 27).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has entered the guide passage forming portion from entering the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 6 is the gaming machine according to form 5,
The specific restriction portion is a plurality of holes (for example, holes 271A to 271H),
At least two or more of the plurality of holes have a size that allows the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion to drop outside the guide passage forming portion before reaching the dispensing portion. have (L11>L2, see FIG. 11)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if a screw member is mixed in the guide passage forming portion, it can be dropped out of the guide passage forming portion from the hole. can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to prevent the screw member from entering the guide passage forming portion from obstructing the flow of the game medium.

The gaming machine of form 7 is the gaming machine according to form 6,
The plurality of holes have different sizes,
A predetermined largest hole among the plurality of holes is provided at a position closest to the dispensing portion (for example, the lateral dimension L12 of the hole 271H is larger than the lateral dimension of the other holes 271A to 271G. See Figure 12)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member can be suitably dropped from the predetermined hole to the outside of the guide passage forming portion, so that the screw member dropped into the guide passage forming portion can be prevented from being mixed into the dispensing portion. .

The gaming machine of form 8 is the gaming machine according to form 6 or 7,
The cover portion (for example, the cover portion 314 of the first cover body 310, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320, the third cover body 330, and There is an uncovered area (e.g., uncovered area 350) that is not covered by the cover portion 334 of
At least some of the plurality of specific restricting portions (for example, holes 271B to 271H) are provided at positions corresponding to the uncovered regions in the guide passage forming portion (see FIG. 27).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the screw member enters the guide passage-forming portion from the uncovered region, it can be dropped out of the guide passage-forming portion through the hole.

The gaming machine of form 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 8,
A game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, a ball tank forming portion 201),
The reservoir is
Arranged on the upper surface side of a predetermined portion (for example, the first projecting portion 224) of the game frame,
It is close to or in contact with the upper surface of the predetermined portion so that the screw member does not enter between it and the upper surface of the predetermined portion (L30<L1, see FIG. 19B).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from entering between the predetermined portion of the game frame and the storage portion and damaging the member.

The gaming machine of form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 9,
A first board (e.g., main board 11, effect control board 12, etc.) attached to a lower position than the guide path forming portion (e.g., first guide path forming portion 202);
a second substrate (for example, a terminal substrate 210) attached at a position above the guide passage forming portion;
with
The first board is mounted by a mounting method using screw members, while the second board is mounted by a mounting method different from the mounting method using screw members (for example, the board cases 11A and 12A are mounted using screw members). The terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 by using locking means consisting of a plurality of regulating parts 235 and locking parts 236 as mounting means different from screw members. See Figure 17)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 11 is the gaming machine according to form 10,
The second board is an external output board (e.g., terminal board 210) to which a wiring (e.g., cable C) for outputting a predetermined signal to the outside of the gaming machine is connected,
The first substrate has a smaller number of wirings to be connected than the external output substrate (for example, the plurality of connection holes 231 of the terminal substrate 210 as the first substrate provided above the first guide path forming portion 202). While the number of cables C that can be connected to is set to the first number (for example, 20), the second Each signal line is also connected to the substrate, but the second number (for example, 10) is smaller than the first number.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the second board, which has a large number of wires to be connected and is likely to be subjected to an external force during the wiring connection work, cannot be attached with a screw member. It is possible to prevent falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 12 is the gaming machine according to form 10 or 11,
a game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, the ball tank forming portion 201);
a mounting frame (for example, a board mounting frame 211) for mounting the external output board to the game frame;
with
The mounting frame is characterized by having a mounting frame restricting portion (for example, recessed portion 242) for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen onto the mounting frame to the guide passage forming portion.
According to this feature, the mounting frame of the external output board can be utilized to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the dispensing portion.

The gaming machine of form 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 12,
The guide passages of the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have moved toward the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) around the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) Special restricting portions (for example, recessed portions 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) are provided to restrict dropping into the forming portion (Fig. 22(C), Figs. 23(A), (B), Fig. 24 reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 14 is the gaming machine according to form 13,
The special restricting portion moves the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that have moved toward the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) to the guide passage forming portion. A special retention portion (for example, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) that can be retained before reaching, and is provided below the screw member attached to the attached portion,
A threaded member that has been detached from the attached portion but has not been retained in the special retaining portion can move toward the cover portion (see FIGS. 22(C), 23(A), (B), and 24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member detached from the attached portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of form 15 is the gaming machine according to form 13 or 14,
The special retention portion is a recess (for example, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) capable of accommodating at least a portion of the screw member,
The depth of the recess is the depth to which part of the screw member protrudes when the screw member is accommodated (see FIGS. 22(C), 23(A), (B), and 24).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member retained in the recess can be easily taken out.

The gaming machine of form 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 15,
A cover portion (for example, the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202),
The cover portion is provided so as to incline downward toward the dispensing portion side,
A specific portion (for example, a ball stop member 340) capable of retaining a screw member dropped onto the cover portion is provided on the payout portion side of the cover portion in the inclined direction (Fig. 15, Figures 26 and 27)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 17 is the gaming machine according to form 16,
The specific part (for example, the ball stopping member 340) allows the game medium (for example, the game ball P) to flow down from the guide path forming part (for example, the first guide path forming part 202); It can be changed to a second state in which the game medium in the guide passage forming portion is difficult to flow down or impossible to flow down (for example, the rotating portion 341 is positioned at the upright position and the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344). A first state in which the game ball in the first guide path forming portion 202 can flow down to the second guide path forming portion 204, and the rotating portion 341 is positioned at the tilted position, and the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344. It is possible to change to a second state in which it is possible to contact the game ball and the game ball in the first guide path forming part 202 cannot flow down to the second guide path forming part 204 (or difficult to flow down).) ,
When the specific portion is in the second state, the screw member tends to stay more easily than when it is in the first state (see FIG. 26).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 18 is the gaming machine according to form 16 or 17,
The cover part
A first cover portion (for example, elongated holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recess 336) provided with a retention portion (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, recess 336) that allows screw members dropped onto the cover portion to be retained on the cover portion ( For example, the cover portion 324 of the first cover body 310, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320),
a second cover portion (for example, the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) provided with the specific portion different from the first cover portion;
It is characterized by including
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 19 is the gaming machine according to form 18,
The second cover portion (for example, cover portion 334 of third cover body 330) is attached by a screw member (for example, screw member N16) having a locking portion (for example, flange portion F) (see FIG. 8). reference)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 19,
A game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, a ball tank forming portion 201),
The storage portion is attached to the game frame at a plurality of locations by screw members (for example, screw members N11 to N14) having locking portions,
A screw member for attaching the storage portion and the guiding passage forming portion (for example, the first guiding passage forming portion 202) to the game frame is designed to fall outside the guiding passage forming portion even if the screw member is disengaged from the game frame. Installed (see Figure 8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member that attaches the storage portion is made difficult to come off from the game frame, and the screw member that attaches the storage portion and the guide passage formation portion falls outside the guide passage formation portion even if it comes off. It is possible to prevent the threaded member that has fallen into the passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 21 is the gaming machine according to form 20,
A plurality of screw members for attaching the storage portion (for example, the ball tank forming portion 201) and the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) to the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) Of these, a predetermined screw member (for example, screw member N12) near the periphery of the game machine is also used as a screw member for attaching a ground wire (for example, ground wire 226) (see FIG. 8).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the number of screw members can be reduced, it is possible to prevent the screw members that have fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 22 is the gaming machine according to form 20 or 21,
The screw members (for example, screw members N11 to N14) for attaching the storage portion (for example, the ball tank forming portion 201) to the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) are provided to reinforce the game frame. Attached to a metal member (for example, a metal plate 222) (see FIG. 8)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the reservoir can be firmly attached.

The gaming machine of form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 20 to 22,
Screw members (for example, screw members N3 to N6) attached to positions above the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) in the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) are It is a screw member different from the screw member having the locking portion.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 24 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 20 to 23,
A game board (e.g., game board 2) detachable from the game frame (e.g., game machine frame 3) is provided,
In the area below the guiding passage forming portion (for example, the first guiding passage forming portion 202) in the game board, there is an inclined surface (for example, the upper portion of the cover body 220) that allows the falling screw member to flow down. wall portion 220H) is provided (see FIGS. 18 to 20 and 27)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has dropped from the guide passage forming portion onto the game board to bounce and be mixed into the guide passage forming portion again.

The gaming machine of form 25 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 24,
A cover portion (for example, the cover portion 360 of Modification 1) provided to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202),
The guide passage forming portion is
a first passage forming portion (e.g., first guide passage forming portion 202) extending downward toward one side (e.g., left side);
a second passage forming portion (for example, a second guide passage forming portion 204) extending downward from the lower end of the first passage forming portion;
has
The cover portion is provided along the first passage forming portion so that the screw member dropped onto the cover portion moves and falls outside the guide passage forming portion from the lower end (Fig. 29 ( A) See)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the delivery portion.

The gaming machine of form 26 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 2 to 25,
A wiring (for example, a cable CH) is provided so as to cross the guide passage forming portion at a position near the predetermined restriction portion (for example, the concave portion 361) in the cover portion (for example, the cover portion 360 of Modification 1). (see FIG. 29(B))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the screw member is likely to get caught on the wiring and remain in the predetermined restricting portion.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
First, the configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described. In the following description, the direction in which the player is positioned is the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the opposite direction is the rear. Also, the description will be made with reference to the up, down, left, and right directions when viewed from a player positioned in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 constituting a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area Y is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot and struck in the game area Y from a predetermined ball shooting device. The game machine frame 3 is provided with a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the glass door frame 50 can open and close the game area Y. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area Y can be seen through the glass window 50a.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, or methacrylic resin, and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. (not shown), a guide rail 2b, etc., and a spacer member integrally attached to the back side of the board. The game board 2 is made of a non-translucent member such as a plywood board and has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front. may be configured

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the bottom left of the game area Y), special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information are variably displayed (also called a special symbol game). A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Incidentally, the "variable display" of the special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation includes a mode of blinking a certain symbol. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area Y on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 . A frame-shaped center decorative frame 51 is provided in the opening 2c of the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the special game and the variable display of the decoration pattern which are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the bottom left of the game area), a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the first reservation display 25A displays the first reservation storage number according to the number of lit LEDs, and the second reservation display 25B displays the second reservation storage number according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). For example, the variable winning ball device 6B includes a starting winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 81, and when the solenoid 81 is in an OFF state, the starting winning opening door is in the closed position, thereby opening the second starting winning opening. It will be in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (it is also said that the second start winning opening is in a closed state). On the other hand, in the variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the starting winning opening door is in the open position, so that the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening (the second It is also said that the starting prize opening is in an open state.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be one that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. Also, when a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including general winning holes is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the bottom left of the game area Y). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area Y, there is provided an out port (not shown) into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports are taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the peripheral portion of the game area Y. It is The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like in order to shoot a game ball toward the game area Y by the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area Y, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held so as to be supplied to the ball launching device ( A batted ball supply plate (upper plate) for storage is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a payout port through which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full. A hitting ball supply tray (lower tray) may be provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area Y, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area Y, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area Y by a player's rotation operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be immediately executed) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during execution of the special game or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start winning has occurred) If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

Incidentally, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot type of jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes "small hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. In addition, during the small-hit game state, some big-hit types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small-hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as payout control board 37 (see FIG. 3), information terminal board, launch control board, power supply board 91 (see FIG. 3), etc. are arranged on the back of pachinko game machine 1. there is

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

In addition, the CPU 103 determines whether or not there is a first start prize or a second start prize, and if there is a prize, a random value for special figure display result determination, jackpot type determination, variation pattern determination, etc. , respectively, and stored (stored) at the top of the empty entry in the first special figure reservation storage section and the second special figure reservation storage section.

Further, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to start the special figure game based on the presence or absence of the reserved data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit and the second special figure reservation storage unit, and the special figure display result Based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for judgment, whether or not the fluctuation display result of the special pattern and the production pattern is a "jackpot" is determined (predetermined) before the fluctuation display result is derived and displayed. Symbol normal processing is executed. In other words, when starting the variable display of the special game, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to derive and display the big win display result as the display result of the variable display based on the random number value stored when the start winning is generated. Execute the process of determining (lottery).

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Back structure of pachinko machine)
Next, the rear structure of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 to 7. FIG. FIG. 3 is a rear view showing the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 4 is a left side view showing the pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 5 is a plan view showing a game machine frame to which a game board is attached. FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko gaming machine is seen obliquely from behind. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a state in which the game board is removed from the game machine frame. 5 to 7, illustration of the glass door frame 50 is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 7, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a game board 2, a game machine frame 3 to which the game board 2 is detachably provided, and a left side of the game machine frame 3. A game hall having a glass door frame 50 provided so as to be able to open and close the front surface of the machine frame 3, and a square frame-shaped outer frame 60 supporting the game machine frame 3 so as to be openable and closable about the left side thereof. By fixing the outer frame 60 to a game island (not shown) installed in the game island, it can be installed on the game island.

At the upper back of the game machine frame 3, a replenishment device 150 (FIGS. 3 and 4) is provided from a circulation path of game balls (hereinafter also referred to as game balls P) provided inside game islands (not shown). ), forming a ball tank forming portion 201 that forms a storage portion capable of storing game balls supplied through the ball tank forming portion 201, and forming a first guide passage that guides the game balls stored in the ball tank forming portion 201 toward the left side. A first guide passage forming portion 202 and a first passage forming body 203 extending in the left-right direction along the upper side portion 3A of the frame 3 for a game machine. A terminal substrate 210, which will be described later, is provided above the first guide path forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

The replenishing device 150 has a guiding member 150A composed of a nozzle or the like capable of guiding the game balls on the circulation route of the game island, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls guided by the guiding member 150A. a sprocket (not shown) capable of driving the sprocket, a drive source (not shown) for driving the sprocket, and the game machine frame 3 when the opening of the outer frame 60 is closed by the game machine frame 3. When the lever switch (not shown) is pressed by the game machine frame 3 in the closed state, the game balls sent out by the sprocket enter the ball tank forming portion 201. When the lever switch (not shown) is not pressed by the game machine frame 3 in the open state, the game ball delivered by the sprocket is held so as not to fall. When the number of game balls stored in the ball tank forming part 201 decreases while the outer frame 60 is in the closed state, the drive source rotates the sprocket and the game balls are sent out by a predetermined number to the ball tank forming part 201. It is designed to be supplied to In the replenishment device 150, a case body 150B is constructed by assembling a plurality of members with a plurality of screw members (not shown). It is fixed at a predetermined location.

In addition, a second guide path forming portion 204 that forms a second guide path that guides the game ball guided to the left side by the first guide path forming portion 202 downward, and a game guided by the second guide path forming portion 204 A payout device 200 constituting a payout section capable of putting out balls, and a payout passage for guiding the game balls paid out by the payout device 200 to the upper tray, that is, forming a payout passage for paying out the game balls to the player. Pachinko game for discharging the game balls guided by the payout passage forming part 205 and the second guiding passage forming part 204 to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1 without paying out from the payout device 200 to the payout passage forming part 205 A second passage forming body 207 comprising a ball removing passage forming portion 206 that forms a ball removing passage leading to a discharge portion (not shown) provided on the lower back side of the machine 1 is provided in the gaming machine frame 3. It extends vertically along the left side of the back surface of the .

The payout device 200 is composed of a case body formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and has therein a sprocket for paying out a predetermined number of game balls (for example, one ball) at a time, a payout motor for rotating the sprocket, and a game ball. A switching valve capable of switching the passage of the balls between the paying-out passage and the ball-removing passage, an operation lever for switching the switching valve, and the like are provided. Further, a board case 91A in which the power board 91 is housed, a board case 37A in which the payout control board 37 is housed, and the like are provided at the lower back of the gaming machine frame 3 .

In this embodiment, a ball break switch (not shown) capable of detecting a game ball is provided at a predetermined position of the second guide path, and the CPU 103 receives a detection signal from the ball break switch (not shown). Based on the input state, it is constantly monitored whether or not there are game balls to be paid out in the second guide passage on the upstream side of the payout device 200.例文帳に追加When the off state of the ball-out switch (not shown) continues for a predetermined time or longer, it is determined that game balls are not supplied to the payout device 200 for some reason such as ball clogging, that is, a replenishment error has occurred, and payout is performed. The payout operation by the device 200 is stopped. In addition, a predetermined display (not shown) connected to the main board 11 displays a replenishment error, and by outputting a replenishment error command to the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 displays the glass door frame 50. A game effect lamp 9 provided at a predetermined place on the front face is illuminated in an error mode, so that notification processing to the effect that a replenishment error has occurred can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 2 is detachably arranged from the front side of the gaming machine frame 3 in an opening 221 formed substantially in the central portion of the gaming machine frame 3 . The game board 2 includes a plate-like body 2a made up of the above-described board plate and spacer members, various game parts (for example, obstacle nails, winning devices, etc.) provided on the front side of the plate-like body 2a, and the plate-like body 2a. Electronic components such as an image display device 5 provided on the back side, a production device having a movable body 32, a board case 12A in which the production control board 12 is stored, a board case 11A in which the main board 11 is stored, and a plate-shaped It is a structure including a cover body 220 that protects a part, a production device, electronic parts, and the like.

The substrate cases 11A, 12A, 91A, and 37A are configured so that each substrate can be housed therein by a base member and a cover member made of a transparent synthetic resin material. , are attached to the game machine frame 3 or the game board 2 by one or more screw members N20, N21 (see FIG. 3), respectively, and the board cases 91A, 37A are attached to the game machine frame 3 by locking means (not shown). Or it is attached to the game board 2 . The cover body 220 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin material in the shape of a box with an open front surface. part can be opened and closed.

As shown in FIGS. 4 to 6, a first passage formation body 203 and a second passage formation body 207 provided on the back surface of the game machine frame 3, and a cover body 220 constituting the back surface of the game board 2 are It protrudes rearward from the outer frame 60 when the outer frame 60 is closed by the machine frame 3 . In particular, the first passage forming body 203 is provided so that the upper surface opening of the ball tank forming portion 201 is arranged behind the upper plate of the outer frame 60 on the upper back surface of the frame 3 for a game machine, so that the pachinko machine can be used for pachinko games. In a state in which the outer frame 60 of the game machine 1 is fixed to a game island (not shown), game balls can be supplied to the ball tank forming section 201 through the supply device 150 from the circulation path above the game island. .

(Mounting Structure of First Passage Forming Body 203)
Next, the mounting structure of the first passage forming body 203 to the game machine frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view showing the attachment structure of the passage forming body to the game machine frame. FIG. 9 is an enlarged rear view showing the upper rear portion of the gaming machine frame.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the game machine frame 3 is a substantially rectangular frame when viewed from the front, and is provided with an opening 221 for mounting the game board 2 thereon. A reinforcing metal plate 222 is provided in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the upper side portion 3A. A mounting member 223 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 to the game machine frame 3 is mounted on the back surface of the metal plate 222 .

The mounting member 223 is formed of a synthetic resin material so as to be able to cover the metal plate 222 from the back side. It is attached to the metal plate 222 by screwing each into a plurality of formed screw holes. On the right side of the mounting member 223, a plate-shaped first projecting portion 224 protrudes rearward, and on the left side of the mounting member 223, an upper wall portion 225A, a rear wall portion 225B, and left and right side wall portions 225C. A three-dimensional second projecting portion 225 projects rearward.

The first projecting portion 224 projects rearward from a lower position than the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225, and the sphere tank forming portion 201 is arranged on the upper side thereof. In addition, the first guide path forming portion 202 is arranged on the rear side of the rear wall portion 225B of the second projecting portion 225, and the board mounting frame 211 for mounting the terminal board 210 is mounted on the upper side thereof. ing. The substrate mounting frame 211 is mounted from the rear side to the mounting hole H6 formed in the upper portion while the locking piece 212 projecting downward from the lower side is inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B. It is attached to the mounting member 223 by screwing the threaded member N6 into a threaded hole formed in the mounting member 223 .

Thus, the mounting member 223 is formed to cover the upper side of the game board 2 by having the first projecting portion 224 and the second projecting portion 225 projecting backward. Therefore, game balls supplied to the ball tank forming portion 201 from above the game islands are prevented from entering the game board 2 . That is, the mounting member 223 functions as a protective cover for the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

The first passage forming body 203 includes a plurality of screw members N11 to N14 attached to the plurality of mounting holes H11 to H14 from the rear side and a screw member N15 attached to the mounting hole H15 from the upper side. They are attached to the attachment member 223 by screwing into the screw holes. The screw member N12 attached to the mounting hole H12 also serves as a screw member for attaching the ground wire 226 for removing the electricity charged in the first passage forming member 203 to the first passage forming member 203. A first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, and a third cover body 330, which will be described later, are attached to the upper portion of the first passage forming body 203. As shown in FIG. The third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage forming body 203 by screwing a screw member N16 attached to the mounting hole H16 from above into a screw hole formed in the rear wall of the first passage forming body 203. there is

As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 8, the threaded members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 include a male threaded portion NS and a head portion NH. It is a flanged screw in which a flange part F as a locking part is integrally formed on the bearing surface of the screw, and by increasing the contact area of the bearing surface and increasing the frictional force, it is difficult to loosen compared to the screw members N3 to N6. It is considered as a screw member.

For example, the diameter L1 of the male screw portion NS of each screw member N1 to N6, N11 to N16 is approximately 1 to 3 mm, the diameter L2 of the head NH is approximately 4 to 7 mm, and the diameter L3 of the flange portion F is approximately 4 to 7 mm. 8 to 10 mm longer than the diameter L2.

The sizes and types of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 are arbitrary, and the dimensions of the diameters L1 to L3 are not limited to those described above. The screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16, which are flanged screws, are screw members integrally formed with a flange portion F (washer). may be attached to the screw member, and the flange portion F and the washer constitute the locking portion of the present invention. Further, the screw member includes a member such as a screw or a bolt that separates from the attached portion when loosened. In addition, the locking portion includes a locking portion for the head NH formed unevenly on the back surface of the head NH and the flange portion F (washer), an adhesive, and the like.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the first passage formation body 203 needs to receive and store the game balls supplied from above the game island in the ball tank formation portion 201, and the first guide passage It is formed in a concave shape with an open upper surface so that clogging of balls is unlikely to occur in the case of clogging of balls, and clogging of balls can be easily eliminated in the event that clogging occurs.

In addition, a first cover body 310 and a second cover body 320 cover the upper surface of the portion where the game balls accumulated in the ball tank forming portion 201 in the vertical direction flow into the first guide passage forming portion 202. In addition, the third cover body 330 is arranged so as to cover the upper surface of the portion where the ball flows from the first guide path forming portion 202 to the second guide path forming portion 204, so that the game ball is rectified. However, although a part of the top opening of the first passage forming body 203 is covered with the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320 and the third cover body 330, the sphere tank forming part 201 and the uncovered area 350 ( 27) is open.

On the other hand, in the vicinity of the periphery of the first passage forming body 203, a plurality of screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 attached to the gaming machine frame 3 and the attachment member 223 are arranged. In addition, above the pachinko machine 1 fixed to the game island, screw members (not shown) for assembling the building blocks constituting the game island, and various devices (for example, A large number of screw members (not shown) for attaching the replenishing device 150, etc., to the frame or the like, and a plurality of screw members for assembling a plurality of members constituting the case bodies of various devices are arranged.

If these screw members are loosened and fall off due to vibration or shock generated in the game island or the pachinko game machine 1, they will roll due to the vibration or shock or the opening and closing of the game machine frame 3, and the ball tank forming part 201 or the first screw member will roll. There is a possibility that they fall inside from the non-covered area 350 of the guide passage forming part 202 and mix into the guide passage of the game ball. In particular, the replenishment device 150 and the like are arranged in the vicinity directly above the ball tank forming section 201 as shown in FIGS. , or when the game machine frame 3 is opened or closed, the replenishment device 150 is likely to vibrate, so a screw member ( (not shown), or when a plurality of screw members for assembling a plurality of members constituting the case body 150B of the replenishment device 150 are loosened due to vibration and fall off, the inside of the sphere tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202 very likely to fall.

Then, when the screw member drops into the ball tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202, it may move toward the payout device 200 side as the game ball flows down, and finally enter the payout device 200. When the screw member enters the payout device 200 in this way, the sprocket or the switching valve may be damaged by the screw member, or the payout motor may be damaged due to the load caused by the ball clogging, or the screw member may be damaged by the player along with the game ball. There is a risk that the player will be paid out immediately, giving the player a sense of discomfort or distrust.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described below, the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 mixes with the dispensing device 200 and damages or breaks down the dispensing device 200, or the screw member is broken together with the game ball. Various measures have been taken to suppress the payout to the player.

(First passage forming body 203)
Next, the first passage forming body 203 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. 10, (A) is a plan view showing the first passage forming body, and (B) is a rear view showing the first passage forming body. 11, (A) is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 10A, (B) is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 10A, and (C) is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 10A. It is a diagram. 12, (A) is a plan view showing the first guide passage forming portion, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD of (A). 13, (A) is a plan view showing the first cover body, (B) is a sectional view taken along line EE of (A), and (C) is a sectional view taken along line FF of (A). 14, (A) is a plan view showing the second cover body, (B) is a GG sectional view of (A), and (C) is a HH sectional view of (A). 15, (A) is a plan view showing the third cover body, (B) is a sectional view taken along line II in (A), (C) is a sectional view taken along line JJ in (A), and (D) is a third cover member. 3 is a perspective view showing a cover body, and (E) is a perspective view showing a ball stopper member. 16, (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the first guide passage forming portion showing the state in which the ball stopper member is in the first state, and (B) is a first guide passage showing the state in which the ball stopper member is in the second state. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows a guidance passage formation part.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the first passage forming body 203 is made of a conductive synthetic resin material, and has a bottom wall portion 203A and a vertical wall portion 203B erected on the periphery of the bottom wall portion 203A. is formed in a concave shape or a concave groove shape with an opening, and has a ball tank forming portion 201 arranged on the right side and a first guiding passage forming portion 202 arranged on the left side. The sphere tank forming portion 201 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a plan view, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 is formed by an upstream portion extending obliquely rearward from the left side of the sphere tank forming portion 201 and a downstream portion extending in the left-right direction. Become. The longitudinal dimension of the ball tank forming portion 201 is longer than the longitudinal dimension of the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that more game balls than the first guide passage forming portion 202 can be stored. It is Further, since the bottom wall portion 203A is formed so as to gradually incline downward from the left side of the sphere tank forming portion 201 toward the right side of the first guide passage forming portion 202, The game ball naturally flows down toward the ball tank formation part 201 and the first guide passage formation part 202 to the left.

A mounting piece 261 facing in the vertical direction is projected from the outer surface of the right standing wall portion 203B of the ball tank forming portion 201, and mounting holes H11 and H12 facing in the front-rear direction are formed in the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 261. . A mounting piece 265 projects from the rear side of the mounting piece 261, and the mounting piece 265 is formed with a mounting hole H15 facing in the vertical direction. A mounting piece 262 facing in the vertical direction is projected from the outer surface of the left standing wall portion 203B of the first guiding passage forming portion 202, and a mounting hole H14 facing in the front-rear direction is formed in the mounting piece 262. A horizontal wall portion 264 protrudes forward from the outer surface of the front vertical wall portion 203B in the upstream portion of the first guiding passage forming portion 202 . A mounting piece 263 is erected on the front side of the horizontal wall portion 264, and the mounting piece 263 is formed with a mounting hole H13 facing in the front-rear direction.

The first passage forming body 203 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 by screwing a plurality of screw members N11 to N15 attached to the attachment holes H11 to H15 into screw holes formed in the attachment member 223. As shown in FIG. A concave portion 280 having a substantially square shape in a plan view is formed on the upper surface of the horizontal wall portion 264 at a position near the rear of the mounting piece 263 .

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, hole portions 270A and 270B are formed at the corners of the bottom wall portion 203A in the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the rear vertical wall portion 203B ( See FIG. 11(A)). A plurality of holes 271A to 271H are formed downstream of the holes 271A and 271B at approximately the central position in the front-rear direction of the bottom wall 203A on the downstream side (left side) of the holes 271A and 271B. In addition, a communication hole 272 is formed through the bottom wall portion 203A at the downstream end portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to drop the game ball into the second guide passage forming portion 204 below. .

A meandering portion 273 is formed in the middle of the first guide passage forming portion 202, and causes the game ball to meander in the front-rear direction and flow down toward the left side. is formed at a position corresponding to the meandering portion 273 . By providing such a meandering portion 273, the ball pressure due to the succeeding ball is prevented from increasing.

In addition, the distance L10 between the front and rear vertical wall portions 203B and 203B lower portions of the first guide passage forming portion 202 is longer than the diameter 2R (about 11 mm) of the game ball and twice the diameter 2R (about 22 mm). (11 mm<L10<22 mm). That is, the first guide path forming portion 202 is formed so as to be able to guide the game balls in one row toward the downstream side.

Since the longitudinal dimension L11 of the holes 271A to 271H excluding the holes 271A and 271B is slightly longer than the diameter L2 of the heads NH of the screw members N3 to N6 (L11>L2), as will be described later, the screw members N3 to Even if N6 enters the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw members N3 to N6 can drop from the holes 271A to 271H. In addition, since the hole 271H formed on the most downstream side has the longest lateral dimension L12 (dimension in the downstream direction of the game ball) compared to the other holes 271A to 271G, the screw members N3 to N6 are connected to the communication hole 272. can be reliably dropped outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 before reaching the .

In other words, these holes 271A to 271H constitute specific restricting portions for restricting movement of the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen into the first guiding passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200. As shown in FIG. It should be noted that dirt and dust other than the threaded member, or any other member can fall from these plurality of holes 271A to 271H.

(First cover body 310)
As shown in FIGS. 13A to 13C, the first cover body 310 extends along the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B on the front side of the ball tank forming portion 201, and the upper end of the standing wall portion 203B extends. A mounting portion 311 having a downward U-shape in cross section that can be fitted from above, a vertical wall portion 312 extending from the right side of the mounting portion 311 toward the rear side, and a right side from the lower portion of the vertical wall portion 312 (forming a ball tank). 201 side), a cover portion 314 extending from the lower portion of the vertical wall portion 312 toward the left side (first guide passage forming portion 202 side), and an attachment A plurality of engaging portions 315A to 315D elastically deformable are mainly formed on the front side of the portion 311 and the front and rear sides of the cover portion 314. As shown in FIG.

The first cover body 310 configured in this manner is configured such that the mounting portion 311 is attached to the sphere tank forming portion 201 while the vertical wall portion 312 is arranged near the boundary between the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 . By fitting the upper end of the front standing wall portion 203B from above, the plurality of locking portions 315A to 315D are elastically locked to the locked portion 317 (see FIG. 18) formed on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 203B. By doing so, it is attached to the first passage forming body 203 . In the attached state, the ball holding portion 313 is arranged to cover a portion of the downstream side of the ball tank forming portion 201 from above, and the cover portion 314 is arranged to cover a portion of the upstream side of the first guide passage forming portion 202. The upper surface of the cover portion 314 is arranged so as to be slightly downward toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 (see FIG. 9).

When the first cover body 310 is attached to the first passage forming body 203, the ball holding part 313 is arranged on the ball tank forming part 201 side, so that the ball tank forming part 201 is moved from the game island (not shown). Even when the supplied game balls are stored so as to pile up in the vertical direction, the game balls are rectified by being pressed downward by the ball pressing portion 313 when flowing down to the first guide passage forming portion 202 side. It is designed to be

In the cover portion 314, long holes 316A to 316C extending in the left-right direction and having the shape of a horizontally long rectangle in a plan view are formed vertically through the cover portion 314 while being arranged in parallel rows. Each of the long holes 316A-316C has the same longitudinal dimension L21, and the longitudinal dimension L21 is shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and the heads of the screw members N1-N6 and N11-N16 mentioned above. It is shorter than the diameter L2 of NH (L21<2R, L21<L2). In other words, the long holes 316A-316C are formed in a size that prevents the game balls and screw members N1-N6, N11-N16 from falling. Reinforcing ribs hang down from the peripheries of the long holes 316A to 316C on the lower surface of the cover portion 314. As shown in FIG.

In addition, since the long holes 316A to 316C are extended along the flowing direction of the game ball, as shown in FIGS. In this case, the game ball P can move in the downstream direction (left side).

(Second cover body 320)
As shown in FIGS. 14A to 14C, the second cover body 320 includes a plate-like cover portion 324 formed along the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, and a cover portion 324 and a plurality of locking portions 325A and 325B which are elastically deformable. In the close state, the plurality of locking portions 325A and 325B are elastically locked to the locked portion 317 (see FIG. 20) formed on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 302B, so that the first passage forming body 203 Mounted on. In the attached state, the cover portion 324 covers a portion of the upstream side of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from above, and is arranged so as to incline downward toward the flowing direction of the game ball (FIG. 9). reference).

On the upper surface of the cover portion 324, recessed grooves 326A to 326C extending in the left-right direction are formed in rows. The concave grooves 326A-326C have different front-to-rear dimensions L22A-L22C, but are each shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball (L22A-L22C<2R). The longitudinal dimension L22B of the central groove 326B, which has the longest longitudinal dimension, is longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L22B>L2). In other words, the recessed groove 326B is formed in a size that cannot accommodate game balls and that can accommodate the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16. Further, the front-rear dimension L22B of the groove 326B is longer than the front-rear dimension L21 of the long holes 316A to 316C of the cover portion 314 (L22B>L21).

In addition, since the front-rear dimension L22A of the recessed groove 326A and the front-rear dimension L22C of the recessed groove 326C are longer than the diameter L1 of the male screw portion NS of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L22B>L1, L22C>L1 ), and is sized to accommodate at least the externally threaded portion NS.

In addition, since the concave grooves 326A to 326C extend along the flowing direction of the game ball and are arranged so as to incline downward toward the flowing direction of the game ball, FIGS. 2, when the game ball P falls to the upper part of the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, the game ball P is guided in the flowing direction (left side).

(Third cover body 330)
As shown in FIGS. 15A to 15C and 16, the third cover body 330 includes a plate-like cover portion 334 formed along the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. , a plurality of locking portions 335A to 335D elastically deformable formed on the front and rear sides of the left end of the cover portion 334, and a screw member N15 protruding between the locking portions 335C and 335D on the rear surface and mounted from above. A mounting portion 331 having a hole H15 formed therein and a ball stopper member 340 provided at the left end of the upper surface of the cover portion 334. It is elastically locked to a locked portion 317 (see FIG. 20) formed on the outer surface of the portion 302B, and the screw member N15 attached to the mounting hole H15 is screwed into the screw hole provided on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 203B. It is attached to the first passage forming body 203 by inserting it. In the attached state, the cover portion 334 covers the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from above, and is arranged so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream direction of the game ball (see FIG. 9).

The cover portion 334 extends obliquely upward from the left side to the right side, and a concave portion 336 having a predetermined depth extends from the right end portion of the upper surface toward the left side. Since the right part reaches the meandering part 273 , it is formed corresponding to the shape of the meandering part 273 . At a position corresponding to the concave portion 336, a horizontally long U-shaped slit 337 is formed in plan view, thereby forming a rectifying plate 338 whose left end side is elastically deformable so as to swing vertically. At the right end, an inclined plate portion 339 inclined downward toward the right side is formed, so that the game balls P stacked up and down are guided toward the bottom wall portion 203A and leveled. (See Fig. 16).

The front-rear dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L23 >2R, L23>L2). That is, the recessed portion 336 is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the game ball P and the heads NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16. Further, the front-rear dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the front-rear dimension L22B of the recessed groove 326B of the cover portion 324 (L23>L22B).

In addition, since the concave portion 336 extends along the flowing direction of the game ball and is arranged so as to incline downward toward the flowing direction of the game ball, as shown in FIG. When the game ball P falls on the upper part of 336, the game ball P is guided toward the flowing direction (left side).

In addition, since the longitudinal dimension L24 of the slit 337 is shorter than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L24<L2), the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 ˜N16 do not drop from the slit 337.

The ball stopper member 340 includes a plate-like front wall portion 341A having a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the rear, a rear wall portion 341B arranged on the rear side of the front wall portion 341A, and the front wall portion 341A and the rear wall portion 341B. It is composed of a rotating portion 341 having a connected left wall portion 341C, a projecting wall portion 341D projecting from the upper end of the left wall portion 341C, and a cylindrical shaft portion 342 facing in the front-rear direction. Bearing portions 343A and 343B are erected on the left side of the upper surface of the cover portion 334 to rotatably support the front and rear ends of the shaft portion 342 . A slit 344 is formed through the right side of the bearing portion 343A in the cover portion 334 so that the front wall portion 341A can be inserted therethrough.

As shown in FIG. 16 , when the third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage formation body 203 , the downstream portion of the first guide passage formation portion 202 is covered by the cover portion 324 . Since the cover portion 324 is arranged to be inclined downward toward the bottom wall portion 203A toward the downstream side (left side), the game balls P stacked up and down in the first guide passage forming portion 202 are covered with the cover portion 324. While flowing down, it is leveled, and finally it is made possible to flow out one by one from the communication hole 272. - 特許庁In particular, the straightening plate 338 is elastically deformable when a game ball comes into contact with it, so that it smoothes (rectifies) the game ball so as to press it downward to the extent that ball clogging does not occur.

(Ball stop member 340)
As shown in FIG. 16A, the ball stopper member 340 is rotatable between an upright position in which the rotating portion 341 stands up and a tilted position in which the rotating portion 341 tilts to the right. is located in the standing position, the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344 to allow the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to flow down to the second guide passage forming portion 204; The part 341 is positioned at the tilted position, the front wall part 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can contact the game ball, and the game ball of the first guide path formation part 202 cannot flow down to the second guide path formation part 204 (or difficult), that is, the ball-stopped state.

By setting the ball stop member 340 to the second state in this way, it is possible to restrict the entry of the game ball into the second guide passage formation portion 204, so that the game inside the second guide passage formation portion 204 in this state It is possible to extract the ball and remove the dispensing device 200 for inspection or replacement.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16A, when the ball stopper member 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating portion 341 is opened and consists of a front wall portion 341A, a rear wall portion 341B, and a left wall portion 341C. The space surrounded by the substantially U-shaped wall in plan view functions as a retaining portion in which the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 can be retained as described later. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16B, when the ball stop member 340 is in the second state, the rotating portion 341 is tilted, but the protruding wall portion 341D is positioned in an upright state so as to cross the passage. Therefore, as will be described later, the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 can be retained on the right side of the projecting wall portion 341D.

(Terminal board 210)
Next, the terminal board 210 will be described based on FIG. 17 with reference to FIG. 17, (A) is a perspective view showing a board mounting frame to which a terminal board is mounted, (B) is a KK section of (A), and (C) is a LL section of (B). .

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 17, the terminal board 210 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear, and has a cable connecting portion (not shown) to which a signal line cable (not shown) connected to the main board 11 or the like is detachable on the back. ) and a mounting member 232 provided with a plurality of connection holes 231 for connecting a plurality of cables C (see FIG. 3) connected to an external device such as a hall computer. Connection pinches (not shown) for pinching the ends of the cables C are provided inside the mounting member 232 at positions corresponding to the connection holes 231 . A spring (not shown) is provided for biasing the connection pinch in the direction of closing it, that is, in the direction of clamping the tip of the cable C. As shown in FIG. The mounting member 232 is provided with a plurality of operation portions 233 for opening each connection pinch (not shown) against the biasing force of a spring (not shown).

The number of cables C that can be connected to the plurality of connection holes 231 of the terminal board 210 as the first board provided above the first guide path forming part 202 is set to the first number (for example, 20). On the other hand, each signal line is also connected to a second board such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 provided below the first guide path forming portion 202, but the number of lines is less than the first number. It is set to the number (for example, 10).

A plurality of the operation portions 233 are provided corresponding to the respective connection holes 231, and have a substantially hook-like shape when viewed from the side, and are swung in the front-rear direction with the base end thereof as the swing axis. When opening the connection pinch (not shown), the operation portion 233 is pushed upward or downward to swing the operation portion 233, thereby releasing the connection pinch (not shown). When the tip of the cable C is inserted into the connection hole portion 231 with the connection pinch opened and the pressing operation of the operation portion 233 is stopped, the connection pinch is closed by the biasing force of the spring (not shown). Cable C comes to be held. The operation portions 233 arranged in the left-right direction have different shapes alternately in the left-right direction so that when a predetermined operation portion 233 is pressed, the adjacent operation portions 233 do not interfere with the pressing operation. there is

The substrate mounting frame 211 is mounted from the rear side to the mounting hole H6 formed in the upper portion while the locking piece 212 projecting downward from the lower side is inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B. It is attached to the mounting member 223 by screwing the threaded member N6 into a threaded hole formed in the mounting member 223 . Further, a horizontally long rectangular opening 234 is formed in the board mounting frame 211 .

On the inner surface of the substrate mounting frame 211, a plurality of restricting portions 235 that restrict the forward movement of the terminal substrate 210 by engaging with the periphery of the terminal substrate 210 inserted from the front side, and the restricting portions 235 prevent the terminal substrate 210 from moving forward. a plurality of locking portions 236 that can be elastically locked from the front side to the peripheral edge of the terminal substrate 210 whose movement is restricted; have. Therefore, the terminal board 210 is inserted from the front side of the board mounting frame 211, and is elastically locked by the locking parts 236 in a state where forward movement is restricted by the plurality of restricting parts 235, thereby mounting the board. It is attached to the frame 211 . That is, the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 by using a plurality of restricting portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from screw members (using a mounting method different from the mounting method using screw members). Mounted.

Since the terminal board 210 is formed with a plurality of connection holes 231 to which the cables C can be connected, during wiring work for connecting a plurality of cables C to the connection holes 231, an operation portion 233 corresponding to each cable C can be operated. need to operate. In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is fixed to the game island and the game machine frame 3 is opened for inspection by a game hall clerk or the like, the cable C hanging down from the upper part of the game island is attached to the outer frame. It may be pulled around in front of 60 and tension may be applied to the connection. In other words, since the terminal board 210 is likely to be subjected to a load on the mounting portion, if it is attached to the board mounting frame 211 or the mounting member 223 with a screw member, the screw member becomes loose and easily comes off. ing.

In addition, when the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211, the connection hole portion 231 and the operating portion 233 of the terminal board 210 face the rear side through the opening 234 (see FIG. 17A). ). Further, since the plurality of operation portions 233 protrude substantially horizontally toward the rear, the screw members N3 to N6 can be held by the plurality of operation portions 233 arranged side by side as described later. A recess 242 is formed between the lower portion of the terminal board 210 and the front portion of the board mounting frame 211 to accommodate the screw members N3 to N6.

(Mounting state of screw members N1 to N16)
Next, the mounting state of the screw members N1 to N16 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 21. FIG. FIG. 18 is a perspective view showing a state where the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back surface of the game frame is seen obliquely from behind. 19, (A) is a plan view showing the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back of the game frame, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM of (A). FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing a state in which the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion on the back surface of the game frame is seen obliquely from behind. FIG. 21 is a plan view showing the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion on the back side of the game frame. 22, (A) is a sectional view taken along line NN of FIG. 21, (B) is a view showing the rotating state of the screw member, and (C) is a sectional view taken along line OO of FIG. 23, (A) is a sectional view taken along line PP of FIG. 21, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line QQ of FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view taken along line RR of FIG. 21. FIG. 25 is a cross-sectional view taken along line SS of FIG. 21. FIG. FIG. 26 shows (A) the retained state of the screw member when the ball stopper is in the first state, (B) is a TT sectional view of (A), and (C) is the ball stopper in the second state. (D) is a UU cross-sectional view of (C). FIG. 27 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing movement of the screw member. FIG. 28 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing the moving state of the game ball on the cover portion.

As shown in FIGS. 9, 18 and 19(A), screw members N1 to N1 for attaching the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222 are provided on the sphere tank forming portion 201 and its periphery on the back surface of the frame 3 for the gaming machine. N2 and screw members N11, N12 and N15 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 to the mounting member 223 are mounted.

Specifically, the screw members N1 and N2 are attached forward from the back side at a position away from the sphere tank forming portion 201 to the right and below the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B of the sphere tank forming portion 201. Therefore, even if the screw members N1 and N2 are loosened and fall backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the possibility of falling into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG. 18 is extremely low. .

The screw members N11 and N12 are attached forward from the back side on the outer surface of the right standing wall portion 203B of the sphere tank forming portion 201 and at a position below the upper edge of the sphere tank forming portion 201. Even if the screw members N11 and N12 are loosened and fall backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the possibility of falling into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG. 18 is extremely low.

The screw member N15 is attached downward from the upper side on the outer surface of the right standing wall portion 203B of the ball tank forming portion 201 and at a position below the upper edge of the ball tank forming portion 201. Even if the screw member N15 loosens due to vibration or shock generated in the machine 1 and falls upward, the possibility of falling into the sphere tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG. 18 is extremely low.

Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12 and N15 receive and store the game balls supplied from the replenishment device 150 from the circulation path above the game island and form a ball tank on which the load of many game balls is applied. Vibrations and impacts are likely to occur due to being arranged around the portion 201, so a screw member with a flange is used, which has a large contact area with the attached portion and is less prone to loosening.

Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12, and N15 around the sphere tank forming portion 201 are located at positions where they are unlikely to fall into the sphere tank forming portion 201 even if they are loosened and fall off, that is, at the upper surface opening of the sphere tank forming portion 201. , the game balls supplied from the replenishing device 150 from the circulation path above the game islands are received and stored in the ball tank forming portion 201, which is open at the top. suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19B, the sphere tank forming portion 201 is close to (or may be in contact with) the upper surface side of the plate-like first projecting portion 224 projecting rearward from the mounting member 223. The gap L30 between the bottom wall portion 203A and the first projecting portion 224 is smaller than the diameter L1 of the male threaded portion NS of the screw member (L30<L1). It is almost impossible for the screw member to be caught between the wall portion 203A and the first projecting portion 224 and held in the vicinity of the sphere tank forming portion 201 .

Further, the gap L31 formed between the rear portion of the bottom wall portion 203A of the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220 is larger than the head portion L2 of the flanged screw member and the diameter L3 of the flange portion F. is also long (L3>L2), the flanged screw member is almost never caught in the gap L31 and held in the vicinity of the sphere tank forming portion 201. As shown in FIG.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 19B, if the screw member N15 slips out of the mounting hole H15 as the mounted portion and falls onto the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220, the upper wall portion 220H is Since the screw member N15 is inclined downward toward the back side, the dropped screw member N15 flows down either rearward or leftward, so that it is almost never held in the vicinity of the sphere tank forming portion 201.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to prevent the dropped screw member N15 from entering each of the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A provided below the sphere tank forming portion 201 and contacting the wiring of the substrate to cause disconnection or the like. .

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9, 20 and 21A, screw members N3 to N5 for attaching the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222 and the substrate A screw member N6 for mounting the mounting frame 211 to the mounting member 223, screw members N13 and N14 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 to the mounting member 223, A threaded member N16 for attaching to is attached.

Specifically, the screw members N3 to N6 are separated from the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the front side and are positioned above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B of the first guide passage forming portion 202 toward the front from the rear side. In addition, the second projecting portion 225 of the mounting member 223 is arranged between the mounting position of each of the screw members N3 to N6 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the screw member Although there is a certain distance from the mounting position of each of N3 to N6 to the first guide passage forming portion 202, the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225 is inclined downward toward the back side, so the pachinko game machine 20, when the screw members N3 to N6 are loosened due to vibrations or shocks generated in 1 and fall off rearward, as shown in FIG. There is a high possibility that it will fall into the guide passage forming portion 202 .

As shown in FIGS. 20 to 22, the screw member N3 is formed in the mounting member 223 at a position forwardly away from the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. is attached to the mounting hole H3. Further, at a position corresponding to the mounting hole H3 on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A, a recessed groove 227 for avoiding interference with the head portion NH when mounting the screw member N3 to the mounting hole H3 is formed in a straight line toward the rear. has been extended to The groove 227 is formed so that the width of the groove 227 tapers toward the rear and becomes shallower. The bottom surface of 227 is substantially horizontal (or slightly slanted downward toward the rear side).

Therefore, when the screw member N3 is loosened and falls out backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a high possibility that the screw member N3 falls into the concave groove 227 on the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225 (Fig. 22(A)). In addition, the screw member N3 that has fallen into the groove 227 is likely to be guided to move rearward in a straight line when vibration or impact occurs. , the screw member N3 is less likely to move rearward than in the region other than the concave groove 227. In other words, the concave groove 227 constitutes a special restricting portion for restricting the screw member N3 moving toward the first guiding passage forming portion 202 from falling into the first guiding passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

Here, all the screw members including the screw member N3 are composed of the head NH and the male threaded portion NS. In many cases, the screw member N3 is tilted in a state in which two points with the tip are in contact (see FIG. 22(A)), so that the tilted screw member N3 as shown in FIG. Occasionally, the head NH swings around the tip of the male threaded portion NS and changes direction. Therefore, if it falls on a flat surface other than the groove 227 on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A, or if it deviates from the rear end of the groove 227, it may move linearly backward, or the head may move backward. The NH may also move to turn left or right by rotating its head. That is, as shown by the arrow in FIG. 20, if it moves backward and bends to the right, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the first cover body 310. There is a high possibility that it will fall on the second cover body 320, and if it moves backward and bends to the left, there is a high possibility that it will fall on the horizontal wall portion 264 in front of the first guide passage.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, when the screw member N3 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H3 is guided to the rear end of the recessed groove 227 and then bent rearward to the right, the first cover body There is a high possibility of falling onto the cover portion 314 of 310 . As shown in FIG. 22A, when the screw member N3 drops onto the cover portion 314, the screw member N3 tilts so that the male threaded portion NS intersects the long holes 316A to 316C, or the male threaded portion NS falls. Although it is inserted into any one of the long holes 316A to 316C, the head NH is retained on the cover portion 314 without falling from the cover portion 314 into the first guide passage forming portion 202 by being locked without falling off. will do. In other words, the long holes 316A to 316C prevent the screw member N3 from dropping onto the first guide passage forming portion 202 onto the cover portion 314 provided so as to partially cover the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a predetermined limiter for limiting.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, when the groove 227 is guided to the rear end of the groove 227 and then linearly moved rearward, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320 or the first passage is formed. It is likely to fall on horizontal wall 264 of body 203 . As shown in FIG. 22(C), when the threaded member N3 falls onto the cover portion 324, the threaded member N3 tilts so that the male threaded portion NS intersects the grooves 326A to 326C. A portion of the head NH is accommodated in the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, so that the head portion NH stays on the cover portion 324 without falling from the cover portion 324 into the first guide passage forming portion 202 . In other words, the concave grooves 326A to 326C prevent the screw member N3 from falling onto the cover portion 324 provided to partially cover the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from falling onto the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a predetermined limiter for limiting.

In addition, when falling onto the horizontal wall portion 264 of the first passage forming body 203 provided between the rear wall portion 225B of the second projecting portion 225 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, the horizontal wall portion 264 Stay in a state of leaning to. That is, the horizontal wall portion 264 side is arranged between the rear wall portion 225B and the first guide passage forming portion 202 below the upper edge of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B, so that the upper wall portion 225A, the vertical wall portion 203B and the horizontal wall portion 264 form a concave portion 290 with an open top, so that the liquid is accommodated and retained in the concave portion 290. As shown in FIG. That is, the recess 290 is provided between the mounting hole H3 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and the screw member that has moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 It constitutes a special restricting portion for restricting N3 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202 .

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, in the first passage forming body 203, the screw member N13 is separated forward from the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and slightly above the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B. It is attached to the attachment hole H13 formed in the attachment piece 263 which is the position. Therefore, when the screw member N13 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a possibility that the screw member N13 falls into the recess 280 formed near the rear side of the mounting hole H13 in the horizontal wall portion 264. high (see FIG. 23(A)). More specifically, the horizontal wall portion 264 is arranged between the mounting piece 263 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 below the upper edge of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B. A recess 280 smaller than the recess 290 is formed in the vicinity of the mounting hole H13 in the recess 290 opened upward by 225A, the standing wall portion 203B and the horizontal wall portion 264, so that the recess 280 is accommodated and stays in the recess 280. Become.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 23B, when the screw member N13 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, the screw member N13 is arranged on the lower left side of the horizontal wall portion 264. It may drop and stay in the concave portion 214 provided near the right side of the board mounting frame 211 . That is, the recess 214 is provided between the mounting hole H13 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and the screw member that has moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 It constitutes a special restricting portion for restricting N13 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N4 is formed in the mounting member 223 at a position forwardly away from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. It is attached to the mounting hole H4. Therefore, when the screw member N4 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a high possibility that the screw member N4 falls onto the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225 (see FIG. 24).

As shown in FIGS. 20, 21 and 24, the screw member N4 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H4 moves backward when it bends to the right, moves backward linearly, and moves backward. As shown in FIG. 24, in any of the cases where the board is turned to the right, it falls from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H of the board mounting frame 211 from above the upper wall portion 225A. The screw member N4 dropped from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H enters the inside through the opening 234 and stays in the concave portion 242 formed by the substrate mounting frame 211 and the terminal substrate 210, or stays in the substrate mounting frame. Although the male threaded portion NS is inserted into the recessed portion 243 formed between 211 and the standing wall portion 203B, the head portion NH may be retained by being locked without falling off. That is, the recessed portion 242 and the recessed portion 243 are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and move toward the first guide passage forming portion 202. A special restricting portion for restricting the screw member N4 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202 is constructed.

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 24, when the screw member N4 drops from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H, the screw member N4 may be held on the plurality of operation portions 233. As shown in FIG. In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is fixed to the game island, the plurality of cables C connected to the plurality of connection holes 231 hang down from the upper part of the game island (see FIG. 3). C may also prevent the screw member N4 from falling from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H. That is, the operating portion 233 and the cable C are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and move toward the first guiding passage forming portion 202. This constitutes a special restricting portion for restricting the falling of the threaded member N4 into the first guide passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

Further, when the screw member N4 falls out of the mounting hole H4 and moves rearward so as to bend to the right, and then crosses the vertical wall portion 203B, the first cover body 203 is removed from the upper surface opening of the first guide passage forming portion 202. 310 , an uncovered region 350 provided between the second cover body 320 and the third cover body 330 , which is not covered by either the second cover body 320 or the third cover body 330 , to the first guide passage forming portion 202 . to fall. The screw member N4 that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 falls out from between the game balls while moving toward the downstream side as the game ball P flows down, and approaches the bottom wall portion 203A. It falls from one of the holes 271B to 271D formed at the position corresponding to the non-coated area 350 in the guide passage forming portion 202 and is discharged out of the first guide passage forming portion 202. FIG.

Further, even if it does not fall from any one of the holes 271B to 271D, it will eventually fall from one of the holes 271A to 271H and be discharged out of the first guide passage forming portion 202. FIG. In other words, the holes 271A to 271H constitute specific restricting portions for restricting movement of the screw member N4 that has fallen into the sphere tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the screw member N4 falls out of the mounting hole H4 and moves backward and bends to the left, and then crosses the standing wall portion 203B, the screw member N4 falls onto the concave portion 336 on the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330. By dropping, it is accommodated and stays in the concave portion 336 without dropping from the cover portion 334 into the first guide passage forming portion 202 . In other words, the recessed portion 336 restricts the screw member N4 from dropping onto the first guide passage forming portion 202, which has fallen onto the cover portion 334 provided so as to partially cover the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202. constitutes a predetermined limit part of

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N6 is formed in the substrate mounting frame 211 at a position forwardly away from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. is attached to the mounting hole H6. Therefore, if the screw member N6 is loosened and falls backward due to vibration or shock generated in the pachinko game machine 1, there is a high possibility that it will fall onto the upper wall portion 211H of the board mounting frame 211 (see FIG. 25).

As shown in FIGS. 20, 21 and 25, the screw member N6 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H6 is guided by a plurality of ribs 211A extending rearward so as to move linearly rearward. After that, when it moves so as to bend to the right, as shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 16, the cover part 334 covers the upper opening of the first guide passage forming part 202 so as to be inclined downward toward the downstream side (dispensing device 200 side). There is a high possibility that the screw member N6 that has fallen to a position in the vicinity of the upstream side of the ball stopper member 340 will move toward the downstream side.

As shown in FIG. 26, the screw member N6 that has moved downstream comes into contact with the ball stop member 340 provided at the downstream end (left end) of the cover portion 334, which is the lower inclined side, and Left side) is restricted to stay on the cover portion 334 .

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, when the ball stop member 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating portion 341 is opened, and the front wall portion 341A and the rear wall portion 341B are opened. , the left wall portion 341C, and the screw member N6 can be retained in the space surrounded by the substantially U-shaped wall portion in plan view. be able to. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 26(C) and 26(D), when the ball stopper member 340 is in the second state, the protruding wall portion 341D is positioned so as to cross the passage in an upright state, so that the screw member N6 is placed on the protruding wall. Since the screw member N6 can be retained on the right side of the portion 341D, the screw member N6 can be held without dropping from the cover portion 334. FIG.

In the second state, the projecting wall portion 341D is arranged so as to intersect the inclination direction, and the front and rear sides are open, so that the screw member N6 whose movement is restricted may drop backward or forward. On the other hand, in the first state, the front wall portion 341A, the rear wall portion 341B, and the left wall portion 341C cover the front wall portion 341A, the rear wall portion 341B, and the left wall portion 341C. It can be retained more reliably than in the second state in which the left wall portion 341C is positioned only on the left side. In other words, the ball stopper member 340 is provided on the side of the dispensing device 200 in the inclined direction of the cover portion 334, and constitutes a specific portion capable of causing the screw member N6 dropped onto the cover portion 334 to stay in the cover portion 334. is doing.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the threaded member N5 is separated from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the mounting member 223 to the front and right side, and is positioned above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. Although it is attached to the formed mounting hole H5, the first guide passage forming portion 202 is not arranged right behind the mounting hole H5, and the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225 is also cut halfway. Therefore, if the screw member N5 loosens due to vibration or impact and falls out backward, it will drop onto the upper wall portion 225A of the second projecting portion 225, but before it reaches the first guide passage forming portion 202, There is a high possibility of dropping from the upper wall portion 225</b>A to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202 .

The screw member N16 is attached to an attachment hole H16 formed in the third cover body 330 on the rear side of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and below the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B. Therefore, if the screw member N5 is loosened by vibration or impact and falls out backward, it is highly likely that it will fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 without falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. .

(action/effect)
As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. N3 to N6, etc. are loosened due to vibrations and impacts generated in the pachinko game machine 1 and fall off, and after moving backward on the upper wall portion 225A due to vibrations, impacts, opening and closing of the game machine frame 3, etc., the cover When it falls on the parts 314, 324, 334, the long holes 316A to 316C, the concave grooves 326A to 326C, the concave part 336 and the ball stop member 340 restrict the fall to the first guide passage forming part 202, Since there is a high possibility that the screws will remain on the cover portions 314, 324, 334 without falling from the cover portions 314, 324, 334 into the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screws that have fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 It is possible to prevent the member from moving and mixing into the dispensing device 200 . In addition, since vertical wall portions are formed at the left (downstream) end portions of the long holes 316A to 316C and the grooves 326A to 326C, even if the screw member moves leftward, can be suitably prevented from falling.

Further, as shown in FIG. 28 , on the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 , the regions other than the uncovered region 350 are covered with the cover portions 314 , 324 and 334 , but the sphere tank forming portion 201 Even if the replenished game ball spills out and gets on the cover parts 314, 324 on the upstream side, the longitudinal dimensions of the long holes 316A to 316C and the concave grooves 326A to 326C are smaller than the diameter 2R of the game ball P. Since the space is also narrow, the game ball P rolls leftward and then falls from the left end of the cover portion 324 to the uncovered area 350 and is returned into the first guide path forming portion 202 .

Therefore, not only can the game ball that has landed on the cover portions 314 and 324 be returned into the first guide path forming portion 202, but also the game ball P can be retained in the long holes 316A to 316C and the concave grooves 326A to 326C. As a result, the space in which the falling screw member N stays is restricted, or it comes into contact with the staying game ball and falls from the uncovered area 350 into the first guide passage forming part 202. can be prevented.

In addition, when the game ball falls on the cover portion 334, it either flows down on the cover portion 334 toward the left side and is restricted by the ball stopper member 340, or falls outside the first guide passage forming portion 202. do.

In addition, in the long holes 316A to 316C as the first retaining portion and the concave grooves 326A to 326C as the second retaining portion, the concave groove 326B is provided at a position closer to the dispensing device 200 than the long holes 316A to 316C, A front-rear dimension L22B is larger than a front-rear dimension L22 of the long hole 316B (L22B>L21). By doing so, the screw member is more likely to be retained in the retaining portion as it approaches the dispensing device 200, so that the screw member dropped onto the cover portions 314 and 324 moves and falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202. can be prevented.

On the other hand, the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen and stayed on the cover portions 314, 324, and 334 move due to vibration, impact, etc., and the non-covered portions provided between the cover portions 324 and 334 move. When it falls from the region 350 into the first guide passage forming portion 202, or after moving backward on the upper wall portion 225A like the screw member N4, it falls from the uncovered region 350 to the first guiding passage forming portion 202. Even if the game ball P falls directly inside the first guide passage forming portion 202, it falls out from between the game balls while moving toward the downstream side and approaches the bottom wall portion 203A. As a result, the screw member dropped into the first guide passage forming portion 202 moves to the dispensing device 200 because it falls from one of the holes 271A to 271H and is discharged outside the first guide passage forming portion 202. Mixing can be suppressed.

A plurality of holes 271A to 271H formed in the bottom wall portion 203A are formed from the midstream portion (near the meandering portion 273) to the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. There is a region where no hole is formed between the holes 270A and 270B which are formed close to each other and the hole 271A which is the most upstream of the holes 271A to 271H. In this way, since a region in which a plurality of holes are not formed is formed in the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, the game balls from the ball tank forming portion 201 flow down in a state of being stacked up and down. By doing so, it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in the strength of the bottom wall portion 203A in the vicinity of the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to which ball pressure is applied.

In addition, by forming a region in which no holes are formed in the first guide passage forming portion 202 in this manner, the screw member dropped from the first guide passage forming portion 202 is formed in the rear wall portion of the cover body 220. Entry into the cover body 220 through the heat radiation hole 220B (see FIG. 6) or the like can be appropriately suppressed.

In addition, by providing the first cover body 310 and the second cover body 320 at positions corresponding to the regions where the holes are not formed in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the first guide passage forming portion 202 is provided with a screw member. can be suppressed from falling, and it is suppressed that the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 does not fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 and is mixed into the dispensing device 200. be able to.

In addition, the hole 271H, which is the largest among the plurality of holes 271A to 271H, is provided at the position closest to the dispensing device 200, so that the screw member can be preferably transferred from the hole 271H to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200 .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27, when a screw member falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the ball tank forming portion 201 or the uncovered region 350, the game ball is are stacked vertically, the screw member is often located above the game ball, but the hole portion 271H is arranged downstream of the straightening plate 338 of the cover portion 334, that is, , Since the game ball is arranged in a position where the game ball is rectified vertically, the screw member easily falls into the hole 271H. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200 .

Further, since at least some of the holes 271B to 271D among the plurality of holes 271B to 271H are provided at positions corresponding to the uncovered regions 350 in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw member is uncovered. Even if it enters the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the region 350, it can be dropped out of the first guide passage forming portion 202 through the holes 271B to 271D.

Furthermore, at least some of the holes 271E to 271H among the plurality of holes 271B to 271H are provided closer to the dispensing device 200 than the uncovered region 350 in the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the above-described Even if the game ball that has fallen from the uncovered area 350 to the first guide passage forming part 202 does not reach the holes 271B to 271D, it moves downward while moving with the flow of the game ball and falls from the holes 271E to 271H. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200 .

Further, as shown in FIGS. 22C, 23A, 23B, and 24, the screw members N3 to N6 that have moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 are moved toward the first guide passage forming portion. Recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 as special retention portions that can be retained before reaching 202 are below screw members N3 to N6 attached to attachment holes H3 to H6 as attachment portions. The screw members N3 to N6 provided in the mounting holes H3 to H6 but not retained in the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243 can move toward the cover portions 314, 324, 334. , the screw members N3 to N6 detached from the mounting holes H3 to H6 can be prevented from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG.

Further, since the depths of the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243 are the depths at which the screw members N3 to N6 partially protrude when the screw members N3 to N6 are accommodated, the recesses 280, 290, The screw members N3 to N6 staying in 214, 242, 243 can be easily taken out.

In addition, the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243, the long holes 316A to 316C, the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, and the recess 336 restrict the falling screw member from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. Not only does it block (or hinder), but it is a retention part that can be retained outside the first guide path formation part 202, so that the screw member can be found when a store clerk or the like at the game parlor conducts an inspection or the like. Since it becomes possible to identify which screw member has come off, it becomes easier to take countermeasures against mixing of the screw member into the dispensing device 200 .

Further, the ball stopper member 340 as the specific portion has the rotating portion 341 positioned at the upright position, the front wall portion 341A deviating upward from the slit 344, and the game ball in the first guide passage forming portion 202 being guided to the second direction. A first state in which it is possible to flow down to the passage forming portion 204, the rotating portion 341 is positioned at the tilted position, the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can come into contact with the game ball, and the first guiding passage forming portion 202 is opened. It is possible to change to a second state in which the game ball cannot flow down to the second guide passage forming part 204 (or difficult to flow down), and when the ball stopper member 340 is in the second state, it is in the first state. Since the screw member is more likely to stay than in the case of , it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from entering the dispensing device 200 .

More specifically, the reason why the ball stopper member 340 is set to the second state is, as described above, when the game ball in the first guide passage or the second guide passage is pulled out, that is, when the game parlor clerk or the like operates the pachinko game machine. 1, the ball stop member 340 is put in the first state, while the pachinko game machine 1 is in operation, that is, when the game hall clerk or the like cannot monitor it. Therefore, it is possible to preferably prevent the screw member from entering the first guide passage forming portion 202 in such a state.

In addition, the sphere tank forming portion 201 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at a plurality of locations by screw members N11 to N14 having flange portions F as looseness preventing portions. The screw members N11 to N14 for attaching to the game machine frame 3 are arranged so as to fall outside the first guide path formation part 202 even if they are detached from the game machine frame 3. It is mounted below the upper edge of the vertical wall portion 203B of the tank forming portion 201 . Therefore, the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the sphere tank forming part 201 are easily loosened due to vibration and the weight of the game ball. Even if the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the first guide passage forming part 202 come off, they will fall outside the first guide passage forming part 202. can be prevented from being mixed into

Further, among the plurality of screw members for attaching the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the game machine frame 3, a predetermined screw member (for example, the screw member N12) near the periphery of the pachinko game machine 1 ) is also used as a screw member for attaching the ground wire (for example, the ground wire 226), so that the number of screw members (the number of parts) can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the screw member from entering the dispensing device 200 . Incidentally, instead of the ground wire, a screw member for attaching a predetermined member other than the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 may also be used.

Further, the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the ball tank forming part 201 to the game machine frame 3 are attached to the metal plate 222 for reinforcing the game machine frame 3, so that the ball tank forming part 201 can be firmly attached, and vibrations are less likely to occur, so loosening of the screw member can be suitably suppressed.

Further, the screw members N3 to N6 attached to the upper position of the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the game machine frame 3 are screw members having a head portion NH with a small diameter that does not have a flange portion F. Even if it falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202, it can be easily dropped from the holes 271A to 271H, so that the screw member can be prevented from entering the dispenser 200. FIG.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 19(B) and 27, in the area below the first guide passage forming portion 202 on the game board 2 detachable from the frame 3 for the game machine, the fallen screw member is placed backward. Alternatively, an inclined surface (for example, the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220) that can flow down to the dispensing device 200 side is provided with a gap from the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the cover body 220 It is possible to prevent the screw member that has dropped on the upper wall portion 220H from jumping and being mixed into the first guide passage forming portion 202 again.

Also, although not shown, the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A are provided so as not to protrude rearward from the rear wall portion of the cover body 220, and drop onto the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220. The screw members are guided so as to flow backward or toward the dispensing device 200 side, thereby preventing the screw members falling on the upper wall portion 220H from falling into the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A arranged below. can be prevented.

In addition, the cover body 220 is provided so as to cover the image display device 5 provided on the back side of the game board 2, the production device having a movable body, and the production control board 12, so that the drive source of these is generated. A plurality of heat radiation holes 220B for releasing heat are formed in the upper part of the rear wall (see FIG. 6). It is preferably of a size that does not allow NH to be inserted. In addition, since there is a high possibility that screw members will fall from the upper holes 270A, 270B, and 271A to 271H of the upper wall portion 220H arranged directly below the first guide passage forming portion 202, the heat radiation hole 220B is Preferably, it is formed at least at positions not corresponding to the holes 270A, 270B, and 271A to 271H in the upper wall portion 220H, or formed at a portion other than the upper wall portion 220H (for example, the rear wall portion). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the falling screw member from falling into the cover body 220 and adversely affecting the image display device 5, the performance device having the movable body, the performance control board 12, and the like.

(Modification 1)
Next, Modification 1 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29A is a schematic rear view showing a cover portion as a modified example, and FIG. 29B is a schematic rear view showing a state in which cables are wired so as to intersect the cover portion.

In the above-described embodiment, the guiding passage forming portion that forms the guiding passage for guiding the game balls of the ball tank forming portion 201 to the payout device 200 is the first ball tank forming portion extending to the left side so as to incline downward. It has a guiding passage forming portion 202 and a second guiding passage forming portion 204 extending downward from the lower left end portion of the first guiding passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG. 16, the cover part 334 of the third cover body 330, which is provided so as to partially cover the upper surface, is provided with a ball stopper member 340 protruding upward from the upper surface of the left end. In the above, the configuration in which the screw member N moving to the left on the cover portion 334 can be received and retained has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cover portion of Modification 1 Like 360, the left end portion 360R of the cover portion 360 may be formed in an R shape that curves toward the second guide passage forming portion 204 below.

By doing so, the game ball P and the screw member N that have fallen onto the cover portion 360 do not remain on the cover portion 360 when moving toward the left end side, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 Since the screw member N directly falls outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the left end portion of the screw member N, it is possible to prevent the screw member N from being mixed into the dispensing device 200 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 29B, in the cover portion 360 in which a recess 361 capable of retaining the screw member N is formed in the upper surface thereof, a second A cable CH may be provided so as to intersect the flowing direction of the game ball in the 1 guide passage forming portion 202 .

By doing so, the movement of the screw member N and the game ball P, which are retained in the recessed portion 361 but may move due to the inclination, can be restricted by the cable C so as to be retained.

(description of variations and applications)
For example, in the above-described embodiment, screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 for attaching the mounting member 223 and the first passage forming body 203 to the game machine frame 3 of the pachinko game machine 1, Screw members (not shown) attached to other parts of the game machine 1, screw members (not shown) for assembling the building blocks that make up the game island, and various devices (for example, , replenishment device 150, etc.) and the like have been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. All screw members such as screw members that have remained in the pachinko game machine 1 for some reason such as forgetting to install them during maintenance at the place can be targeted, but at least they have been installed in the pachinko game machine 1 in advance. It is preferable that the screw member can be prevented from being mixed into the dispensing device 200 .

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as a storage portion capable of storing game media, the sphere tank forming portion 201 formed in a box-like shape with an open upper surface by the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion B is applied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as long as the storage portion can store game balls, the front-rear dimension is larger than the front-rear dimension of the first guide passage-forming portion 202 like the ball tank-forming portion 201 described above. It does not have to be long, and the front-to-rear dimension may be substantially the same as or shorter than that of the first guide passage forming portion 202 . In addition, as long as the game balls supplied from the supply device 150 can be received, the upper surface does not necessarily have to be open.

In the above-described embodiment, the payout device 200 capable of paying out game balls with a rotatable sprocket is applied as a payout unit capable of paying out game media, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be a payout device that can pay out game balls by members other than sprockets.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion 203B serve as the guide passage forming portion having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage for guiding the game media in the storage portion to the payout portion. Although the configuration in which the groove-shaped first guide passage forming portion 202 is applied is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the guide is composed of a tubular member having an opening formed in a part of the upper surface. It may be a passage forming portion, and the shape, size, and the like can be variously changed. In addition, the width dimension (front-rear dimension) of the ball tank forming part 201 may be substantially the same or larger, and the game balls may be guided so as to flow down in a plurality of rows.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball tank forming portion 201 as a storage portion capable of storing game balls and the first guide passage whose upper surface is open and which guides the game balls in the ball tank forming portion 201 to the payout device 200 are provided. Although the form in which the first guiding passage forming portion 202 to be formed is integrally formed is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the first guiding passage forming portion 202 are separately formed. The members may be integrally formed by assembling them with screw members or the like. In this case, the threaded member for assembling the sphere tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 is also subject to the threaded member of the present invention.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the screw member can enter from the top opening of the first guide passage forming portion 202 was illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 The screw member may enter through a hole or a notch formed on the vertical wall side. In addition, when a screw member may be mixed in the second guide passage forming portion 204, a predetermined restricting portion for restricting the fall of the screw member to the second guide passage forming portion 204, or the second guide passage forming portion 204 A specific restricting portion or the like for restricting the movement of the dropped screw member to the dispenser 200 may be provided.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330 are applied as the cover parts provided so as to partially cover the upper surface of the first guide passage forming part 202. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire area of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be covered with the cover portion.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the cover portion that covers a partial region of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be configured by a member separate from the first guide passage forming portion 202, It may be integrally formed with the first guide passage forming portion 202 in advance. In other words, the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be formed in advance in a square tubular shape.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the screw member is retained on the cover portion as a predetermined limiting portion for limiting the drop of the screw member dropped onto the cover portions 314, 324, 334 to the first guide passage forming portion 202. Although the embodiments in which the elongated holes 316A to 316C as the holes that allow the thread to be inserted, the grooves 326A to 326C and the recess 336 as the recesses are applied, the present invention is not limited to this, and the screw member A fall restriction part (drop obstruction part) that can restrict (or obstruct) the fall from the cover part, and a movement restriction part (movement obstruction part) that can restrict (or obstruct) the movement of the screw member on the cover part Alternatively, it may be a drop guide portion such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member so that it can fall from the cover portion to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202 . Note that the means capable of restricting or inhibiting falling or movement may be not only the protrusions and recesses, but also magnets capable of attracting metal screw members, adhesive parts capable of adhering screw members, and the like.

In other words, the predetermined limit portion for limiting the drop of the screw member dropped onto the cover portions 314 , 324 , 334 onto the first guide passage forming portion 202 is Not only those that make it impossible to fall, but also those that make it difficult to fall.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of specific restricting portions are provided in the first guiding passage forming portion 202 to restrict the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guiding passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 toward the dispensing device 200 is restricted ( Alternatively, it may be a movement restricting portion (movement inhibiting portion) capable of inhibiting movement. It should be noted that the means capable of restricting or inhibiting the movement to the dispensing device 200 side is not limited to the protrusions and recesses, but may be a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member, an adhesive portion capable of adhering the screw member, or the like. However, it is preferable to provide them at positions that do not affect the flow of the game ball (for example, the corners between the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion 203B, which are not in contact with the game ball).

That is, the specific restricting portion provided in the first guide passage forming portion 202 for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the dispensing device 200 is the dispensing device 200 for the screw member. If the movement to the side can be restricted, the movement of the screw member mixed in the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the dispensing device 200 side is not necessarily disabled, and the movement can be made difficult. Anything is fine.

Further, when the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the dispensing device 200 is restricted (restricted, inhibited) by the specific restricting portion provided in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the movement is restricted. There is a high possibility that the screw member that is restricted and stays in the first guide passage restricts the downflow of the game ball, resulting in ball clogging. When ball clogging occurs, the replenishment error notification is executed as described above, so that the game hall clerk or the like opens the game machine frame 3 to form the ball tank forming part 201 on the back or the first guide passage. There is a high possibility that the state of the game ball in the section 202 will be visually inspected. At this time, since the screw member remains in the first guide passage forming portion 202 without moving to the dispensing device 200, it becomes easier for the store clerk or the like to identify that the ball clogging was caused by the screw member. Appropriate measures can be taken.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, all of the plurality of holes 271A to 271H have a size that allows the screw member to drop, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the plurality of holes 271A 271H are formed so that the screw member can be dropped, the other holes may not be capable of dropping the screw member. Moreover, the shape and size of the plurality of holes 271A to 271H are arbitrary and can be changed in various ways without being limited to the above-described forms.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main board 11 and the production control board 12 are applied as the first board attached to the lower position than the first guide passage forming part 202, but the present invention is limited to this. Other substrates such as relay substrates may also be targeted.

In the above-described embodiment, the terminal substrate 210 is applied as the second substrate attached above the first guide passage forming portion 202, but the present invention is not limited to this. , other substrates such as a relay substrate may be used as the second substrate.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 as the first board are exemplified by the form in which the board cases 11A and 12A in which these boards are accommodated are attached to the game board 2 by the screw members N20 and N21. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the various substrates as the first substrate may be attached directly to the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3 without interposing the substrate case.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 as the first board are configured such that the board cases 11A and 12A in which each board is accommodated are screw members N20 and N21, that is, screw members are used. The terminal board 210 as the second board is attached to the game board 2 by an attachment method, using locking means consisting of a plurality of restricting portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from screw members, that is, Although a form in which the board mounting frame 211 is mounted by a mounting method different from the mounting method using a screw member is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. It may include attachment means, adhesion means using an adhesive or the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the screw member is provided around the first guide passage forming portion 202 to restrict the screw member moving toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. As a special restricting portion for making the first guiding passage forming portion 202 of the screw member, the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 are applied, but the present invention is not limited to this. a fall restricting portion (fall inhibiting portion) capable of regulating (or inhibiting) the fall of, a movement regulating portion (movement inhibiting portion) capable of regulating (or inhibiting) movement of the screw member to the first guide passage forming portion 202, , a drop guide portion such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member so that it can drop out of the first guide passage forming portion 202, or the like. In addition, as a means capable of restricting or inhibiting the falling or movement of the first guide passage forming portion 202, not only the convex portion and the concave portion, but also a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member and a magnet capable of adhering the screw member. It may be an adhesive portion or the like.

In other words, the special restricting portion for restricting the falling of the detached screw member to the first guide passage forming portion 202 is not only the portion that disables the dropping of the screw member to the first guide passage forming portion 202, Any material can be used as long as it makes it difficult to fall. For example, a convex portion as a fall restricting portion (fall inhibiting portion) and a concave portion or a hole as a movement restricting portion (movement inhibiting portion) may be provided at predetermined positions of the upper wall portion 225A or the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion 202 in which the concave portions 280, 290, 214, 242, 243, etc., are provided as the special restricting portion is in the vicinity of the front standing wall portion 203B. Although it was exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least it is provided in the vicinity of the vertical wall portion 203B as long as it is between the mounting portion (mounting hole) to which the screw member is mounted and the guide passage forming portion. For example, it may be provided at a position closer to the attached portion than the guide passage forming portion between the attached portion and the guide passage forming portion of the screw member.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first Although the form which applied the ball stop member 340 which can change to the 1st state which makes the game ball of the guidance passage formation part 202 flow down, and the 2nd state which makes it difficult or impossible to flow down was illustrated, this invention It is not limited to this, and any member provided on the side of the payout device 200 in the inclined direction (lower side of the inclination) of the cover portion 334 may restrict the movement of the screw member even if it does not have a ball stopper function. It may be a convex portion, a standing wall portion, or a wiring retainer that can (or obstruct).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball stopper member 340 as the specific portion is provided on the payout device 200 side in the inclined direction of the cover portion 334, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the specifying portion may be provided at the end portion of the dispensing device 200 side of the cover portions 314 and 324 as long as it is provided at the dispensing device 200 side end portion of one cover portion.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball stopper member 340 as the specific portion is configured by a member separate from the cover portion 334, but the present invention is not limited to this. A specific portion (a ball stop portion) may be integrally formed with a part of the member that constitutes the cover portion 334 .

Further, in the above embodiment, as an example of the locking portion, the flange portion F (washer) having a larger diameter than the head portion NH of the screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16 and integrally formed with the head portion NH However, the present invention is not limited to this, instead of the flange portion F, a washer or the like that is formed separately from the screw member and can be attached to the screw member may be used, or the head Also included are the anti-rotation portion of the head NH formed in an uneven shape on the back surface of the NH and the flange portion F (washer), an adhesive agent, and the like. Moreover, the threaded member is not limited to one that can be attached with a tool such as a screwdriver, but may be a thumbscrew, or includes a member such as a screw or a bolt that separates from the attached portion when loosened.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball tank forming portion 201 as the storage portion is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at a plurality of locations by the screw members N11 to N14 having the flange portion F as the locking portion to form the ball tank. The screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the portion 201 and the first guiding passage forming portion 202 to the game machine frame 3 are designed so as to fall outside the first guiding passage forming portion 202 even if they come off the game machine frame 3. , the first guiding passage forming portion 202 and the sphere tank forming portion 201 are mounted below the upper edge of the standing wall portion 203B of the sphere tank forming portion 201, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the position is above the upper end edge of the vertical wall portion 203B of the guiding passage forming portion 202 or the ball tank forming portion 201, for example, it may be displaced in the horizontal direction from the position directly above the first guiding passage forming portion 202 or the ball tank forming portion 201. If the screw member is attached at a non-directly above position, it is possible to prevent the screw member from directly falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202 . Further, the dropped screw member is guided to fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 by a predetermined guiding portion (for example, a concave groove formed in the upper wall portion 225A). good too.

Further, the predetermined restriction portion, the specific restriction portion, the special restriction portion, and the specific portion in the above-described embodiments are not only the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 attached to the pachinko game machine 1, but also the pachinko game such as game islands. Although the embodiment of restricting or regulating (obstructing) the movement of the screw member other than the machine 1 to the payout device 200 has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least the screw member is attached to the pachinko game machine 1. Restrict or restrict the movement of the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16, and the screw members N3 to N6 attached above the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the sphere tank forming portion 201 to the dispensing device 200. It is preferably formed in a size and shape that allow (inhibition).

(Characteristic part 053SG)
Next, a form for implementing a gaming machine in the characterizing part 053SG according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 30-1 to 30-24.

The game machine in the characteristic part 053SG is a pachinko game machine or a slot machine installed in a game hall or the like, and in particular, as shown in FIG. Equipped with a game control board. As the game machine described below, the pachinko game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment can be applied, and the main board 11 of the above-described embodiment can be applied as the game control board, and the effect control board 12 can be applied as the effect control board. is.

As shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is connected with a plurality of input components such as various switches and sensors for detecting input conditions according to the progress of the game. Input components include, for example, detection switches that detect operations by the player, detection switches that detect the passage of game media such as game balls and medals, sensors that specify the positions of movable objects used in games such as reels, detection switches used for various settings such as the degree of advantage of the door, and detection switches for detecting door opening, abnormalities, and the like.

In addition, the game control board, as shown in FIG. 30-1, is equipped with an input circuit that detects the input signal from these input components, and the detection status of the input signal from the input component by the input circuit is specified. The input data is transmitted to the game control microcomputer and used for game control by the game control microcomputer.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is connected to a plurality of output components such as indicators, LEDs, motors, solenoids, etc., which perform output control according to the progress of the game. Output components include, for example, a display that displays according to the lottery result, a display that displays the progress of the game and the state of the gaming machine, a display that instructs the player on the operation mode, and a value owned by the player. , an LED that indicates the game state, an LED that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality, a motor, a solenoid, and the like that operate movable parts used in the game, such as reels and variable winning devices.

In addition, the game control board, as shown in FIG. 30-1, is provided with an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the corresponding output component based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. , the game control microcomputer transmits output data to the output circuit, thereby controlling the output components according to the progress of the game.

In addition, the game control microcomputer, the input circuit and the output circuit are connected via a data bus, and input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The transmission of the output data of is through a shared data bus.

Also, not all input circuits are connected via a shared data bus, but some input circuits are connected directly to the game control microcomputer without a data bus, and are connected to a shared data bus. Input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer without going through.

The output circuits are all connected via a shared data bus. The configuration may be such that the output data is transmitted from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit without passing through the data bus.

In addition, the data bus is connected to an external output terminal, and the output data from the game control microcomputer is output to the external device as an external output signal. It is possible to inspect the performance of the game machine using the output data output as.

Next, the game control board provided in the gaming machine of the present invention will be explained using the following Examples 1 to 3.

The structure of the game control board in Example 1 will be described. The game control board has electronic components mounted on one surface and no electronic components mounted on the other surface, and has a configuration in which the terminals of the electronic components are soldered. The surface is called a mounting surface, and the surface on which no electronic component is mounted and terminals of the electronic component are soldered is called a soldering surface.

FIG. 30-2 is a diagram showing the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-3 is a diagram showing the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 30-2 and 30-3, the game control board has a rectangular shape consisting of a pair of short sides extending in the vertical direction and a pair of long sides extending in the horizontal direction, and has an insulating printed board. Consists of In addition, the game control board is formed with a plurality of through holes passing through the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board are configured with conductors so as to appropriately connect the through holes. A plurality of wiring patterns are formed. In addition, in the area where the wiring pattern is not formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board, a ground area is formed by an insulating area made of an insulator and a conductor and forming a ground. The ground area is a solid ground formed over almost the entire area other than the area where the wiring pattern and the insulating area are formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board.

As shown in FIG. 30-2, wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction are arranged on the mounting surface in a larger proportion than wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction, and on the other hand, as shown in FIG. , more wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction are arranged than wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction. Therefore, the wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction are concentrated on the mounting surface, and the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction are concentrated on the soldering surface. Designs such as bypassing wiring patterns can be reduced as much as possible.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-3, the wiring pattern arranged on the solder surface has many wires extending in the same horizontal direction as the long side, so the wiring pattern distance is longer than the wiring pattern arranged on the mounting surface. However, as mentioned above, electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, not on the soldering surface, and the relatively long wiring pattern placed on the soldering surface is obstructed by the electronic components. is avoided.

Further, when branching the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, one of the branched wiring patterns is formed on the solder surface and the other is formed on the mounting surface through the through holes. One wiring pattern of the branch destination is detoured, and the one wiring pattern of the branch destination and the other wiring pattern do not cross each other on the same plane.

FIG. 30-4 is a diagram showing the mounting surface of the game control board in the present embodiment in which the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted.

As shown in FIG. 30-4, electronic components such as the aforementioned game control microcomputer, input circuit, and output circuit are mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board. These electronic components include electronic components having one or more terminal rows each composed of a plurality of terminals arranged in one direction. Most of the electronic components having these terminal rows are arranged along the long side of the game control board, that is, in the horizontal direction. As mentioned above, on the mounting surface, there is a large percentage of wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction, and electronic components with terminal rows are often arranged along the long side of the game control board, that is, arranged in the horizontal direction. By doing so, it is possible to directly connect the wiring pattern extending in the vertical direction to the terminal rows arranged in the horizontal direction without changing the direction of the wiring pattern.

30-4, the input circuit and the output circuit among the electronic components having a terminal row are formed in a rectangular shape and provided with a recessed notch on one of the short sides, and on the surface The model number is printed so that the orientation of the part can be specified by the orientation of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. As shown in FIG. 30-4, the input circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the left side in FIG. 30-4 and the model number is printed from left to right. 30-4, the notch faces right and the model number is printed from right to left. It is possible to specify whether the circuit is present or whether it is an output circuit.

FIG. 30-5 is a diagram showing the configuration of the data bus formed on the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern which branched.

The game control board is formed with a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit as described above. . The data bus formed on the game control board of this embodiment is composed of eight wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction formed on the solder surface, and as shown in FIG. It consists of eight wiring patterns formed so as to extend laterally toward the right side from through holes to which terminals of a game control microcomputer mounted on the left side are connected. As shown in FIG. 30-6, the data bus, input circuits, output circuits, and other electronic components are connected to a wiring pattern formed so as to branch out to the mounting surface side through through holes and extend vertically in the vertical direction. connected by

When connecting the game control microcomputer and electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits separated in the horizontal direction through the data bus, first, the terminals of the game control microcomputer extend in the horizontal direction. It is connected to a data bus on the surface, branches to a wiring pattern on the mounting surface side extending vertically toward the electronic component through a through hole at a position where the electronic component is mounted, and is connected to the electronic component. Therefore, it is not necessary to bypass the wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and it is possible to efficiently connect the game control microcomputer and the electronic parts separated in the horizontal direction. In addition, since the wiring pattern forming the data bus is formed on the solder surface on which electronic components are not mounted, the data bus is less likely to be affected by noise from the electronic components. Since the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the hole is used for connection, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is shortened, and the influence of noise from the electronic components during this period is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 30-5, the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction forming the data bus are not formed in a straight line, but divided into a plurality of wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction. The length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) is an antenna that maximizes resonance according to the bus clock (frequency used when transmitting data on the data bus) when transmitting data on the data bus. It is formed shorter than the length (λ (bus clock)/2). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the wiring pattern forming the data bus from having an antenna length corresponding to the bus clock and unintentionally emitting radio waves due to resonance. Furthermore, even if the length of the antenna is half the length corresponding to the bus clock, it may reflect off the surface of the substrate and cause strong resonance. The lengths (L1 to L8) are formed to a length that is not half the antenna length at which resonance is maximized according to the bus clock. Emission of radio waves is also prevented.

In addition, the bus clock varies depending on the game control microcomputer and the oscillator to be installed, but the length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) depends on the bus clock, which is the maximum frequency assumed among them. The length of the antenna is shorter than the length of the antenna that maximizes resonance, and the length of the antenna is less than half the length of the antenna that maximizes resonance according to the bus clock that has the maximum frequency. Therefore, even when data is transmitted with a bus clock frequency lower than the expected maximum frequency, unintended radio waves are prevented from being generated.

As shown in FIG. 30-5, a plurality of divided horizontal wiring patterns forming a data bus are arranged in an oblique right direction or an oblique left direction. They are connected across wiring patterns extending in different directions. Further, the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction and the wiring pattern in the oblique right direction or the oblique left direction are connected while being bent at an obtuse angle. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unintended emission of radio waves from the bent portion of the wiring pattern.

Also, as shown in FIG. 30-5, through holes (A to F shown in FIG. 30-5) provided on oblique wiring patterns that connect a plurality of divided horizontal wiring patterns are used for mounting. Wiring patterns on the surface side (wiring patterns connected to A to F shown in FIG. 30-6) are branched, and oblique wiring patterns that connect the divided horizontal wiring patterns to each other. are used to branch the wiring pattern that constitutes the data bus.

In addition, in the game control board in the first embodiment, in order to make the length of the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction shorter than the antenna length that maximizes resonance, the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction is divided into a plurality of wiring patterns, and a plurality of In this configuration, the horizontal wiring patterns divided into two are connected to each other by oblique wiring patterns formed on the same soldering surface. In other words, horizontal wiring patterns are alternately formed on the soldering surface and the mounting surface so that the horizontal wiring pattern length is shorter than the antenna length at which resonance is maximized. Also good. In such a configuration, it is preferable to branch the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction at the point where the wiring pattern is switched from the soldering surface or the mounting surface to the other surface. , the wiring patterns forming the data bus can be branched without intersecting on the same plane.

Figure 30-7 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ground area formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, Figure 30-8 is formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the configuration of a ground area;

As shown in FIGS. 30-7 and 30-8, the ground area is formed over almost the entire area other than the area where the wiring pattern and the insulating area are formed on the mounting surface and soldering surface of the game control board. The ground area formed on the game control board comprises a first ground area and a second ground area electrically separated via an insulating area. In both the mounting surface and the soldering surface, the first ground area is formed in the left area of the game control board, and the second ground area is formed in the right area of the game control board.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30-7, a wiring pattern that transmits a low voltage (Vcc (+5 V) in this embodiment) signal such as a game control microcomputer, an input circuit, an output circuit, etc. is connected. Electronic components (low-voltage components) are mounted on the left area where the first ground area is formed, and ground terminals of the low-voltage components are connected to the first ground area. On the other hand, electronic parts (high voltage parts) to which wiring patterns for transmitting high voltage (VLD (+24 V) in this embodiment) signals are connected, such as drive circuits for operating motors, solenoids, etc. It is mounted on the right area where two ground areas are formed, and the ground terminal of the high voltage component is connected to the second ground area. This prevents unintended reverse flow of current from the high voltage component to the low voltage component via the ground area. In addition, since the first ground area and the second ground area are formed on opposite side sides of the game control board, interference with each other is prevented even if a potential difference occurs temporarily.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30-9, a capacitor is provided between the first ground area and the second ground area. Even if a potential difference occurs temporarily, current is prevented from flowing from one ground area to the other ground area.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-7 and 30-8, an insulating region in which no wiring pattern is formed is formed between the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. The ground area and the second ground area are electrically separated. Further, the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the first ground region and the second ground region on the soldering surface are formed so as to overlap each other, and the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface are formed so as to overlap each other. Since the insulating region that separates the ground regions and the insulating region that separates the first ground region and the second ground region on the solder surface are also formed so as to overlap each other, from one surface of the mounting surface and the solder surface to the other surface Mutual interference is prevented even if a potential difference occurs temporarily.

30-10 is a diagram showing the configuration of the connector mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, FIG. 30-11 is a connector formed on the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment FIG. 30-12 is a diagram showing a peripheral wiring pattern, and FIG. 30-12 is a diagram showing a state in which the game control board in this embodiment is housed in the board case.

As shown in FIG. 30-10, the game control board has a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN7 mounted near the lower side of the mounting surface for connecting wires from the outside of the game control board. In the wiring from the game control board, there are a signal that triggers the lottery, a signal that changes the set value that defines the advantage for the player such as the probability of the lottery, and a signal that changes the set value. Wiring for inputting or outputting signals related to the degree of advantage in the game, such as signals, signals for displaying information advantageous to the player on an external display, wiring for inputting the detection signal of the error cancellation operation, backup power supply wiring as a supply line for

As shown in FIG. 30-10, the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 are not directly connected to the wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. -11, it is connected to a wiring pattern formed on the solder side, that is, the side opposite to the side on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30-10, no wiring pattern is formed around the mounting portion of the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface, and information about the connector such as the connector number is printed therearound. ing. The information printed around the mounting portions of the connectors CN1 to CN7 is not limited to the connector number, and may be configured to print the number of terminals, the direction of the connector, the connection destination, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 30-11, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the solder surface passes through the through holes at the end opposite to the side connected to the terminals, and the wiring on the mounting surface passes through. connected to the pattern. In particular, the through holes a to h shown in FIGS. 30-10 and 30-11 are through holes to which the terminals of electronic components are connected, and the wiring patterns connected to the terminals provided in the connectors CN1 to CN7 are It is provided at the place where it is first connected to the electronic component. Therefore, it is possible to connect from the solder surface to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface using the through holes for connecting to the electronic component.

As shown in FIGS. 30-12(A) and 30-12(B), the game control board is attached to the game machine while being accommodated in the board case. The substrate case can be sealed by a one-way screw, sealing seal, welding, or the like, and once sealed, it is difficult to open without leaving a trace. Therefore, by attaching the game control board to the game machine in a state where it is housed in the board case, it has a structure that prevents fraudulent use of the game control board.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 30-12 (A) and (B), the substrate case is provided with a covering portion that covers the area around the connectors CN1 to CN7 when the game control substrate is housed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30-10, the wiring pattern is not formed in the area covered by the covering portion of the board case of the mounting surface of the game control board, and the wiring pattern is formed avoiding the area. there is The covering portion is provided with insertion holes having substantially the same shape as the connectors CN1 to CN7, and the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed to the outside through these insertion holes so that wiring from the outside can be connected.

Even when the game control board is housed in the board case in this way, since the connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to wiring from the outside, a slight gap is generated around the connectors CN1 to CN7. are not directly connected to the wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted, and are not directly connected to the solder surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. It is designed to be connected to the wiring pattern formed on the opposite side, and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1 to CN7 is short-circuited from the periphery of the portion where the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the substrate case. Fraudulent acts such as disconnection are prevented.

In addition, the periphery of the mounting portion of the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface is covered by the covering portion of the board case, and the area covered by the covering portion includes wiring connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7. No wiring patterns including patterns are formed, and the wiring patterns connected to the terminals provided in the connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to the wiring patterns on the mounting surface in areas other than the covering portion, It is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting or disconnection of the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1 to CN7 from the periphery of the portions where the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the board case.

FIG. 30-13 is a circuit diagram relating to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 30-13, Vcc (+5V) is generated by the power board and connected to the power input terminal Vcc of the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board. In addition, Vcc (+5V) is branched from the line supplied to the game control microcomputer on the power supply board, and is connected to the charging capacitor through the backflow prevention diode, and the backflow prevention diode and the charging capacitor A line branched between is connected to the backup power supply input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer.

While the power is being supplied, Vcc (+5V) is supplied as a drive power source for the game control microcomputer, and the charging capacitor is charged. On the other hand, when the power supply is stopped, the supply of Vcc (+5V) is stopped, so that the backup power supply VBB charged in the charging capacitor is supplied to the game control microcomputer, The game control microcomputer is supplied with the backup power supply VBB so that the data stored in the RAM of the game control microcomputer is retained. In this embodiment, the backup power supply is configured to be supplied from a power supply board outside the game control board, but may be configured to be supplied from a circuit provided within the game control board.

30-14 is a diagram showing a wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-15 is formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between the wiring pattern formed on the soldered surface and the wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface;

As shown in FIG. 30-14, on the soldering surface of the game control board, wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying normal power and wiring patterns VBB for supplying backup power are provided as wiring patterns constituting power supply lines. , are formed. The wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3, as shown in FIGS. 30-14 and 30-15, are configured by a wiring pattern formed on the solder surface and a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, and are mounted on the game control board. Connected to electronic components. On the other hand, the wiring pattern VBB, as shown in FIG. 30-14, consists only of wiring patterns formed on the solder surface. That is, the wiring pattern VBB is connected to the backup power input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer only through the wiring pattern formed on the soldering surface without being connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface. That is, the wiring pattern VBB supplied with the backup power supply VBB from the power supply board is formed only on the solder surface. Therefore, the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply VBB is supplied does not need to detour the electronic parts mounted on the mounting surface, and the distance of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer can be shortened, so that noise from the outside can be reduced. This prevents the data stored in the RAM from being corrupted by noise.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-15, on the mounting surface, a solid ground is formed in the portion where the wiring pattern VBB is formed on the solder surface side. Therefore, the wiring pattern VBB on the solder surface side is less susceptible to noise because the solid ground formed on the mounting surface blocks noise. Further, as shown in FIG. 30-15, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern VBB for supplying the backup power is closer to the mounting surface than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying the normal power. In the region corresponding to , the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side, especially the wiring pattern used for signal transmission, is formed at a position where there are few crossing points. Therefore, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern VBB to which backup power is supplied from the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side is suppressed as much as possible.

In the present embodiment, among the wiring patterns formed on the soldering surface, the wiring pattern VBB for supplying the backup power supply is located in the corresponding region on the mounting surface side rather than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying the normal power supply. is formed at a position where there are few intersections with the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side. For example, a wiring pattern that transmits a signal related to the player's profit is closer to the mounting surface than a wiring pattern that transmits a signal that is not directly related to the player's history, such as a signal for controlling output parts. In the corresponding area, the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side is formed at a position where there are few crossing points, so that the signal formed on the mounting surface side can be used for transmission. The influence of noise on the wiring pattern, through which the signal related to the profit of the player is transmitted from the wiring pattern, is suppressed as much as possible.

In addition, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern that transmits the reset signal to the game control microcomputer and the wiring pattern that gives the operation clock to the game control microcomputer are relatively important. A place where a wiring pattern for signal transmission intersects a wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side in a corresponding region on the mounting surface side rather than a wiring pattern for transmitting other signals. By adopting a configuration in which the noise is reduced, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern used for signal transmission formed on the mounting surface side and transmitting signals of relatively high importance is minimized. suppressed.

FIG. 30-16 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which the game control board is attached to the slot machine. The slot machine is equipped with game parts related to games such as a liquid crystal display, an effect control board for controlling effects, a reel unit consisting of a plurality of reels, and a hopper unit for paying out medals. When the game control board is attached to the slot machine, the game control board has the mounting surface side, that is, the surface opposite to the solder surface on which the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied is formed on the game component side. Mounted to be positioned. By adopting such a configuration, the influence of noise emitted from the game parts on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply is supplied can be suppressed.

FIG. 30-17 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which the game control board is attached to the pachinko game machine. When the pachinko gaming machine is installed in a game arcade, it is often installed in such a manner that the back faces of other gaming machines such as other pachinko gaming machines face each other. When the game control board is attached to the pachinko game machine, the game control board has a mounting surface side, that is, a surface opposite to the solder surface on which the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied is formed. It is attached so that it is arranged on the device side. By adopting such a configuration, the influence of noise emitted from other game machines on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply is supplied can be suppressed.

(Effect 1)
In the game control board of this embodiment, wiring patterns are formed on both the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface has a ratio of the wiring pattern extending in the first direction (vertical direction). The ratio of the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) different from the first direction (horizontal direction) is higher than that of the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction). direction). According to such a configuration, the wiring patterns extending in the first direction (vertical direction) are concentrated on the mounting surface, and the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) are concentrated on the soldering surface. When the wiring pattern extending in the (vertical direction) and the wiring pattern extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) intersect, design such as bypassing the wiring pattern can be reduced as much as possible.

The game control board of this embodiment is a quadrilateral consisting of a pair of sides (left side and right side) extending in a first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of sides (upper side and lower side) extending in a second direction (horizontal direction). It is characterized by its shape. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern can be formed along the shape of the game control board without waste.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that an electronic component having a terminal row consisting of a plurality of terminals is arranged so that the terminal rows are arranged in the second direction (horizontal direction). According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern extending in the first direction (horizontal direction) can be directly connected to the electronic component.

The game control board of this embodiment includes a pair of short sides (left side and right side) extending in the first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of long sides (upper side and lower side) extending in the second direction (horizontal direction). It is characterized in that the electronic component is mounted only on the mounting surface and the electronic component is not mounted on the soldering surface. According to such a configuration, it is possible to form a wiring pattern in the second direction (horizontal direction), in which the distance can be long on the solder surface, without being obstructed by the electronic component.

In the game control board of the present embodiment, the wiring pattern includes a wiring pattern branching from one wiring pattern to two wiring patterns, one of the two wiring patterns at the branch destination is formed on the mounting surface, The other wiring pattern is characterized in that it is formed on the solder surface. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to detour one of the wiring patterns at the branch destination, or to cross the one wiring pattern at the branch destination with the other wiring pattern on the same plane. can be formed.

(Effect 2)
The game control board of the present embodiment connects the first terminal (terminal of the game control microcomputer) and the second terminal (input circuit, terminal of the output circuit) separated in a specific direction (horizontal direction), and a specific signal ( A specific wiring pattern (data bus) used for transmitting input data and output data) is formed, and the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is formed of a plurality of wiring patterns consisting of straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction). Each linear wiring pattern formed by division and extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) has a specific length (λ/2), which is an antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of a specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized by being formed shorter than According to such a configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is formed by dividing into a plurality of wiring patterns consisting of straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction), and straight lines extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) are formed. Each wiring pattern is formed shorter than a specific length (λ/2), which is the antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data), so that the specific wiring pattern (data bus ) can be prevented from having an antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data), and unintended radio waves can be prevented from being emitted.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) are connected by wiring patterns extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (horizontal direction). . According to such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) with a simple structure.

In addition, the game control board of the present embodiment has a configuration in which straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) are connected by a wiring pattern extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (horizontal direction). Alternatively, wiring patterns may be formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and linear wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) may be alternately formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. Also in such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) with a simple structure.

In the game control board of the present embodiment, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is different from the specific wiring pattern (data bus) between one wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) and the other wiring pattern. It is characterized by branching into According to such a configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be preferably branched by utilizing the space between one wiring pattern extending in the specific direction and another wiring pattern.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) has an antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency (maximum frequency assumed as a bus clock) of each specific signal (input data, output data) It is characterized in that it is formed shorter than a specific length (λ/2). According to such a configuration, since the length of the straight wiring pattern extending in the specific direction (horizontal direction) is shorter than the antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency of the specific signal (input data, output data), It is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted even if a signal is transmitted by

In the game control board of this embodiment, the straight wiring pattern extending in a specific direction has a specific length (λ/2), which is the antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized in that the length is not 1/2 (λ/4). According to such a configuration, the straight wiring pattern extending in the specific direction (horizontal direction) is 1/2 of the specific length (λ/2), and strong resonance occurs due to reflection from the surface of the substrate. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unintended emission of radio waves.

(Effect 3)
The game control board of the present embodiment includes a first electronic component (low voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of a first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is connected, and a second voltage (VDL (+24V)). A second electronic component (high-voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of is connected is mounted, the first electronic component (low-voltage component) is connected to the first ground area, and the second electronic component ( The high voltage components) are characterized by being connected to a second ground area separated from the first ground area by an insulator. According to such a configuration, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern through which the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+5V) is transmitted) is connected is connected to the first ground area, and the second voltage is connected to the first ground area. A second electronic component (high-voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of (VDL (+24 V)) is connected is connected to a second ground region separated from the first ground region by an insulating portion (insulating region). Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unintended reverse flow of current through the ground.

In addition, in the game control board of the present embodiment, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+5V)) is connected is connected to the first ground area, A second electronic component (high-voltage component), to which a wiring pattern that transmits a signal of a second voltage (VDL (+24 V)) is connected, is connected to a second ground region separated from the first ground region by an insulating portion. Regarding the configuration, in a configuration in which there is a large difference in the current flowing through the wiring pattern that connects the first electronic component and the second electronic component, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground area, and the second electronic component is connected to the first ground area. It may be configured to be connected to a second ground region separated from the first ground region by an insulating portion. Even if the current difference between the patterns is large, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground area and the second electronic component is connected to the second ground area, so that an unintended reverse current flows through the ground. can be prevented.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that a capacitor is provided between the first ground area and the second ground area. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a current from flowing from one ground area to the other ground area even if a potential difference occurs temporarily between the first ground area and the second ground area due to the capacitor. .

In the game control board of the present embodiment, a first ground area is formed on one side (left side), a second ground area is formed on the other side (right side) opposite to one side, and a first electronic component (low voltage component ) is mounted in the first ground area, and the second electronic component (high voltage component) is mounted in the second ground area. According to such a configuration, since the first ground area and the second ground area are formed on the opposite sides of the game control board, they can be prevented from interfering with each other even if a potential difference occurs temporarily.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) in which no wiring pattern is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area is formed on both the mounting surface and the solder surface. is characterized by With such a configuration, the insulation between the first ground region and the second ground region can be enhanced.

In addition, the game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area on both the mounting surface and the solder surface. Even in a configuration in which a non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) is formed between the first ground area and the second ground area on at least one of the mounting surface and the solder surface, the first ground area and the Insulation between the second ground regions can be enhanced.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the first ground area and the second ground area on the mounting surface and the first ground area and the second ground area on the solder surface are formed in areas corresponding to each other. and the non-wiring pattern area (insulating area) of the solder surface are also formed in corresponding areas. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent mutual interference even if a potential difference is temporarily generated from one surface of the mounting surface and the solder surface to the other surface.

(Effect 4)
The game control board of this embodiment is attached to the game machine while being housed in the board case, and connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) for attaching wiring from the outside of the game control board are mounted on the mounting surface. The terminals of (connectors CN1 to CN7) are characterized in that they are connected to wiring patterns formed on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected not to the mounting surface on which the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are mounted, but to the wiring pattern formed on the opposite solder surface. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting or disconnection of wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from the periphery where the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are exposed from the board case.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring connected to the connector (connectors CN1 to CN7) is connected to the wiring related to the advantage of the game (signal for changing the setting value to a changeable state, changing the setting value (wiring for inputting or outputting signals for displaying information advantageous to the player on an external display). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent cheating related to game advantage.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that information (connector number) on the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is displayed around the mounting portions of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. According to such a configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected to wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, and wiring patterns are formed around the mounting portions of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. Since the wiring pattern is not formed, by displaying information (connector number) on the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) in this portion, the portion where the wiring pattern is not formed on the mounting surface can be effectively used.

In the game control board of the present embodiment, the board case has a covering portion covering the area around the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7), and the wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are: It is characterized in that it is formed on the solder surface in the region covered by the covering portion. With such a configuration, wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are not formed on the mounting surface even in the periphery of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7). (Connectors CN1 to CN7) can be reliably prevented from fraudulent actions such as short-circuiting or disconnection of wiring patterns connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from the exposed portions.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface at the point where it is first connected to the electronic component. . According to such a configuration, it is possible to connect to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface using the through holes for connecting to the electronic component.

(Effect 5)
In the game control board of the present embodiment, a plurality of electronic components including a game control microcomputer having storage means (RAM) are mounted on the mounting surface, and no electronic components are mounted on the solder surface. The microcomputer for is capable of holding the stored contents of the storage means (RAM) by a specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) supplied by the wiring pattern, and the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) is a game control microcomputer. The wiring pattern (VBB) to be supplied to is characterized in that it is formed only on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern that supplies the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is formed only on the solder surface on which electronic components are not mounted, bypassing the electronic components. Since the distance of the wiring pattern can be shortened, it is difficult to receive noise from the outside, and the data stored in the memory means (RAM) can be prevented from being damaged by the noise.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that the mounting surface side is attached so as to be placed on the side of the game components (liquid crystal display, effect control board for controlling effects, etc.) related to the game. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise emitted from the game parts on the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that it is attached so that the mounting surface side is arranged on the other game device (another game machine) side. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer from the influence of noise emitted from other game machines.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the area on the mounting surface side corresponding to the area provided with the wiring pattern (VBB) that supplies the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer on the solder surface is solid. A ground is formed. According to such a configuration, noise from the mounting surface side can be blocked by the solid ground formed on the mounting surface.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring pattern (VBB) that supplies a specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is more It is characterized in that there are few intersections with the wiring pattern for transmitting signals in the corresponding area on the mounting surface side. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from the wiring pattern for transmitting signals on the mounting surface side as much as possible.

Embodiment 1 of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the present invention is not limited to this embodiment, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. It goes without saying that

For example, in the present embodiment, an example in which the configuration according to the present invention is applied to a game control board for controlling a game has been described. The configuration according to the present invention may also be applied to a board for controlling game media and the provision of game values, a board for relaying between boards, and the like.

The structure of the game control board in Example 2 will be described. As in the first embodiment, the game control board has electronic parts mounted on one side, no electronic parts mounted on the other side, and terminals of the electronic parts are soldered. The configuration of the game control board in the second embodiment is basically the same as the configuration of the game control board in the first embodiment, and here, mainly the configuration different from the game control board in the first embodiment will be described. .

30-18 is a view showing the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1, and FIG. 30-19 is a view showing the soldering surface of the game control board in this example.

As shown in FIGS. 30-18 and 30-19, the game control board has a rectangular shape consisting of a pair of short sides extending in the vertical direction and a pair of long sides extending in the horizontal direction, and has an insulating printed board. Consists of A plurality of through holes are formed in the game control board, and a plurality of wiring patterns are formed in the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board so as to appropriately connect the through holes. In addition, an insulating area and a ground area are formed in the area where the wiring pattern of the mounting surface and the soldering surface of the game control board is not formed.

Also in the game control board in the second embodiment, similarly to the game control board in the first embodiment, an input circuit and an output circuit are mounted. A concave notch is provided on one side, and the model number is printed on the surface, so that the orientation of the part can be specified by the direction of the notch and the direction of printing the model number. The input circuit is arranged so that the cutout is on the left side in the figure and the model number is printed from left to right, while the output circuit is arranged so that the cutout is on the right side in the figure and the model number is printed. It is arranged so that the printing direction is from right to left, and it is possible to identify whether these electronic components are input circuits or output circuits by the position of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. there is

FIG. 30-20 is a diagram showing the configuration of the data bus formed on the soldering surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern which branched.

The game control board is formed with a data bus that is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The data bus formed on the game control board of this embodiment is composed of eight wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction formed on the solder surface, and as shown in FIGS. It consists of eight wiring patterns formed so as to extend laterally toward the right side from through holes to which terminals of a game control microcomputer mounted on the left side are connected. As shown in FIG. 30-21, the data bus, the input circuit and the output circuit are connected by a wiring pattern formed to branch to the mounting surface side through the through hole and extend vertically in the vertical direction. .

When connecting the game control microcomputer and the laterally separated input and output circuits via the data bus, first, the terminal of the game control microcomputer extends in the lateral direction on the data bus on the solder surface. at the position where the input circuit or output circuit is mounted, branch to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side extending in the vertical direction toward the input circuit or output circuit through the through hole, and connect to the input circuit or output circuit becomes. Therefore, there is no need to bypass the wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and the game control microcomputer can be efficiently connected to the laterally separated input and output circuits. In addition, since the wiring pattern forming the data bus is formed on the solder surface on which electronic components are not mounted, the data bus is less susceptible to noise from the electronic components. are connected by wiring patterns branched to the mounting surface side through through-holes, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is shortened and is less susceptible to noise from the electronic components during this period.

Also, as shown in FIG. 30-22, the data bus is connected to the noise elimination circuit at a position closer to the game control microcomputer than any input circuit or output circuit connected to the data bus. This makes it difficult for noise on the data bus to affect the game control microcomputer.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 30-20, on the game control board, connectors CN10 to CN17 for connecting wires from the outside of the game control board are mounted in the vicinity of the upper side in the figure, and a data bus is installed. The wiring pattern is formed in an area near the lower side of the game control board in the figure, that is, in an area near the other side opposite to the one side on which the connectors CN10 to CN17 are mounted. For this reason, a wide area for mounting electronic parts such as input circuits and output circuits is ensured between the data bus and the connectors CN10 to CN17 for signal input/output with electronic parts outside the game control board. It's becoming

As shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, the game control board has an input signal from the first input component, which has relatively low importance among the input components used for game control (not triggering the lottery). A first input circuit that detects the input of a sensor or switch detection signal, etc.), an input signal from a second input component that is more important than the first input component (sensor or switch detection signal that triggers the lottery, an advantageous A second input circuit that detects input such as a detection signal that changes the set value that defines the speed, based on the output data from the game control microcomputer, the operation of the movable parts such as solenoids and motors according to the progress of the game A first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that performs the second output that displays according to the progress of the game, such as various indicators and LEDs, based on the output data from the game control microcomputer A second output circuit that outputs output signals to parts, based on the output data from the game control microcomputer, is mounted on the game control board, and the payout rate when playing the game for a certain period of time, etc. A third output circuit is implemented for outputting an output signal to a performance indicator for displaying performance.

A first output circuit, a first output circuit, a second output circuit, and a third output circuit among these input circuits and output circuits are connected to a data bus, and transmission of input data and transmission of output data are performed via the data bus. is done.

As shown in FIG. 30-20, the wiring pattern that constitutes the data bus connected to the terminal of the game control microcomputer on the solder surface branches to the mounting surface side through through holes at multiple points, and is vertically mounted on the mounting surface. It is connected to the wiring pattern formed in the direction. As shown in FIG. 30-21, the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the through hole at the position M in the figure is connected to the terminal of the first input circuit. Further, the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface through the through hole at the position N in the figure is connected to the terminal of the third output circuit. Wiring patterns branched to the mounting surface through through holes at positions O and P in the figure are connected to the terminals of the first output circuit. Further, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side connected through the through hole at the position Q in the drawing is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit and branches on the mounting surface. The remaining wiring pattern is connected to the wiring pattern on the solder side once through the through hole at the position R in the figure, and is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting side through the through hole again at the position S in the figure. and connected to the external output terminal.

As shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, the input circuit of the input circuit and output circuit connected by a shared data bus has a wiring pattern length from the output circuit to the game control microcomputer. It is connected to the data bus so that it is short. Therefore, the input data used for game control is less susceptible to noise and the like.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, among a plurality of output circuits connected by a shared data bus, an output signal is output to a first output component that operates a movable portion according to the progress of the game. has a shorter wiring pattern length to the game control microcomputer than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that displays according to the progress of the game. are connected to the data bus so that Therefore, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like, which affects the operation of the movable portion according to the progress of the game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, among the plurality of output circuits connected by the shared data bus, the third output circuit that outputs the output signal to the performance indicator is Data so that the length of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the display (second output component) that performs display according to the progress of the game Connected to a bus. For this reason, it is difficult to tamper with the contents of the performance display by arranging illegal parts or the like.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 30-21, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side, which is connected through a through-hole at the position Q in the drawing, from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the soldering surface side, changes according to the progress of the game. It is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that outputs, and branches on the mounting surface, and the branched wiring pattern outputs the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device It is connected to an external output terminal for outputting to. In this way, by utilizing the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through holes from the data bus formed on the soldering surface, the wiring pattern is connected to the second output circuit in order to output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side. and the wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal for outputting the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device. Since it is not necessary to branch to the soldering surface side from the data bus formed on the mounting surface in order to branch to each wiring pattern connected to the wiring pattern, the wiring pattern is formed simply.

The wiring pattern on the mounting surface side, which is connected through a through hole from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the soldering surface side, outputs an output signal to a second output component that outputs according to the progress of the game. It may be configured such that it is connected to terminals of two output circuits, and branched on the mounting surface, and the branched wiring pattern is connected to an output circuit for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device. Even with such a configuration, it is desirable to use the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through-holes from the data bus formed on the soldering surface, so that the output corresponding to the progress of the game can be performed on the mounting surface side. By branching the wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit and the wiring pattern connected to the output circuit for outputting the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device, it is connected to a plurality of output circuits. Since it is not necessary to branch to the soldering surface side from the data bus formed on the mounting surface for branching to each wiring pattern, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

Among the input circuits, the second input circuit is not connected to the data bus and transmits input data directly to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus. As shown in FIG. 30-21, the wiring pattern connected to the terminal of the game control microcomputer on the mounting surface is connected to the wiring pattern on the solder surface side through the through hole once at the position of T in the figure, U in the figure It is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side again through the through hole at the position of , and is connected to the terminal of the second input circuit.

Thus, the first input circuit for detecting the input of the input signal from the first input component, which is relatively less important among the input components used for game control, communicates with the game control microcomputer via the data bus. A second input circuit that is connected but detects input of an input signal from a second input component having higher importance than the first input component is not connected to the data bus and is directly connected without going through the data bus. It is designed to be connected to a game control microcomputer, and the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is transmitted through the data bus through which the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Since it is transmitted to the game control microcomputer without intermediary, the input data based on the important input signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer without being affected by the input data from other input circuits or the output data to the output circuit. It will be transmitted.

(Effect 6)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit. According to such a configuration, the input circuit for transmitting the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component (input component) used for controlling the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer is the game control microcomputer Since the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit that outputs the output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the data bus, Data can be prevented from being affected by noise or the like.

The game control board of this embodiment is configured such that the input circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit. It may be configured to be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than, and with such a configuration, based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer An output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) transmits input data based on an input signal from an electronic component (input component) used to control the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer. Since the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the input circuit, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. a first output circuit for outputting an output signal to a first output component that operates a movable portion according to the progress of a game based on output data transmitted from a game control microcomputer; a second output circuit for outputting an output signal to a second output component that displays according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer, the first output circuit comprising: It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit. According to such a configuration, the first output circuit that outputs the output signal to the first output component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game outputs the second output that displays according to the progress of the game. Since the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the part, the output data is affected by noise etc. It is possible to prevent the operation of the movable part according to the progress from being affected.

In addition, the game control board of the present embodiment is configured such that the first output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit. The output circuit may be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the first output circuit. A second output circuit that outputs an output signal to a second output component that performs display, and a first output circuit that outputs an output signal to a first output component that operates a movable portion according to the progress of a game. Also, since the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is connected to the data bus so as to be short, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise, etc., and affecting the display according to the progress of the game. can.

Also, like the game control board of the first embodiment, a first ground area where low voltage components are mounted is formed on the left side where the game control microcomputer is arranged, and a first ground area where high voltage components are mounted on the right side. When two ground areas are formed, the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game often belongs to the high voltage component. The second output circuit, which is mounted in the second ground area and outputs an output signal to the second output part that displays according to the progress of the game, is often mounted in the first ground area because it belongs to the low voltage parts. The Rukoto. In such a configuration, the second output circuit is configured to be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the first output circuit, and the second output circuit is connected to the first ground. By mounting the second output circuit in the area, it is not necessary to mount the second output circuit, which is a low-voltage component, in the second ground area together with the first output circuit, which is a high-voltage component, thereby preventing a load from being applied to the second output circuit. can.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. Electronic parts are mounted only on the mounting surface, and a data bus is formed on the soldering surface, and the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected from the data bus through through holes is used to output output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface. The wiring pattern is branched into a wiring pattern connected to a second output circuit for playing the game and a wiring pattern connected to an external output terminal for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device. According to such a configuration, the second output for outputting according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side using the wiring pattern on the mounting surface connected through the through holes from the data bus formed on the solder surface. Since the wiring pattern connected to the circuit and the wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal for outputting the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device are branched, in order to branch to each of these wiring patterns Since there is no need to branch from the data bus formed on the soldering surface to the mounting surface side, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus is formed which is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. A first input circuit for transmitting input data based on an input signal from a first input component used for controlling the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer, and a first input circuit used for controlling the game control microcomputer A second input circuit that transmits input data based on the input signal from the 2 input components to the game control microcomputer, and a first output component and a second output component based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer It includes a first output circuit and a second output circuit that output an output signal, and the first input circuit, the first output circuit and the second output circuit are connected to a game control microcomputer via a data bus. , the second input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to a game control microcomputer without a data bus. According to such a configuration, the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is used for game control without passing through the data bus through which the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Since it is transmitted to the microcomputer, the input data based on the important input signal can be transmitted to the game control microcomputer without being affected by the input data from other input circuits or the output data to the output circuit. .

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface and a data bus is formed on the solder surface. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the data bus from being affected by noise from electronic components.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the data bus, the input circuit and the output circuit are connected to each other by a branched wiring pattern on the mounting surface opposite to the soldering surface on which the data bus is formed through through-holes. and According to such a configuration, since the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, the influence of noise can be reduced.

In the game control board of this embodiment, connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from the outside of the board are mounted near one side (upper side), and the data bus faces one side of the game control board. It is characterized in that it is formed in a region closer to the other side (lower side) than the other side. According to such a configuration, an area for mounting electronic components such as an input circuit and an output circuit can be secured between the connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) and the data bus, so that the substrate area can be effectively utilized. .

In the game control board of this embodiment, a performance indicator for displaying the performance of the gaming machine is mounted, and the third output circuit for outputting an output signal to the performance indicator outputs an output signal to another indicator. It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output second output circuit. According to such a configuration, the third output circuit that outputs the output signal to the performance display device, the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the other display device to the game control microcomputer Since the wiring pattern is short, it is possible to make it difficult to modify display contents by arranging illegal parts.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted so that the component orientations are different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the data bus is connected to the noise elimination circuit at a position closer to the game control microcomputer than the input circuit and the output circuit. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the game control microcomputer.

Although the second embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this second embodiment, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. Also, the same or similar configuration as the first embodiment has the same effects as those described in the first embodiment. Further, the modified example exemplified for the first embodiment can also be applied to the second embodiment.

The structure of the game control board in Example 3 will be described. As in the first and second embodiments, the game control board has electronic parts mounted on one side, no electronic parts mounted on the other side, and terminals of the electronic parts are soldered. It should be noted that the game control board in Example 3 is characterized by the structure of the mounted electronic components and the through holes, and here, the structure of the electronic components and the through holes will be described.

30-23 are perspective views showing the structure of the specific electronic component mounted on the game control board in Example 3, (A) is a perspective view from above of the specific electronic component, and (B) is a , and a perspective view from below of the specific electronic component.

The specified electronic component is a relatively large electronic component such as a key switch, and below the specified electronic component, as shown in FIGS. For the purpose, fixing terminals 1 and 2 that are not used to propagate signals and power of the specific electronic component, connection terminals that are connected to the wiring pattern of the substrate and are used to propagate signals and power of the specific electronic component, is provided. Moreover, the model number of the specific electronic component is stamped or printed above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 on the side surface of the specific electronic component.

In this embodiment, a key switch having both a fixing terminal and a connection terminal is exemplified as the specific electronic component, but other electronic components may be applied as the specific electronic component. An electronic component having only connection terminals without fixing terminals may be applied as the specific electronic component.

The through-holes provided in the game control board consist of normal through-holes and specific through-holes. As shown in Fig. 30-24(A), a normal through-hole is plated with copper, which is a conductor, from the solder surface to the inner peripheral surface of the through-hole. It is a through hole that conducts with On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30-24(B), a specific through-hole is a through-hole in which the inner peripheral surface of the through-hole is not copper-plated and the through-hole does not conduct between the mounting surface and the soldering surface. be.

Normally, when soldering to the through-hole from the soldering surface side, as shown in Fig. 30-24(A), since the inside of the through-hole is copper-plated, the solder inside the through-hole does not reach the mounting surface. Although it will flow up, when soldering to a specific through hole from the soldering surface side, as shown in FIG. The solder does not flow up and the solder does not reach the mounting surface.

In this embodiment, the specific electronic component is fixed by inserting the fixing terminals 1 and 2 through the specific through holes, inserting the connection terminals through the normal through holes, and soldering them from the solder surface side.

In this way, the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are inserted through the specific through holes and fixed by soldering from the soldering surface side, so that the solder does not reach the mounting surface. It is possible to prevent troubles such as the model number printed or stamped above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 being hidden by the solder due to excessive rise to the mounting surface side where the component is mounted.

In particular, if the model number is hidden by solder, even if the part is illegally replaced, there is a risk that it will not be discovered. Also, if the model number is hidden in the model test, it will not be possible to specify the component configuration, and the test will not be approved. There is a risk that the terminal will not be able to receive the terminal, or that installation at the amusement arcade will not be approved because the model number cannot be confirmed at the time of installation at the amusement arcade. Such a problem can be prevented by fixing with .

On the other hand, since the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are terminals that are not used for transmitting signals or electric power of specific electronic components, problems arise even if the electrical connection is weakened when they are soldered to the specific through-holes. never On the other hand, the connection terminals are usually inserted through the through-holes and fixed by soldering from the solder surface side, so that the solder reaches the mounting surface to ensure electrical connection.

(Effect 7)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface of the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and wiring patterns are formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. A specific through-hole is formed in which a specific electronic component among a plurality of electronic components is fixed by inserting a terminal into the through-hole penetrating the surface and the soldering surface and soldering the through-hole and the terminal, The specific through-hole is characterized in that the solder surface of the mounting surface does not conduct and the solder does not reach the mounting surface when the terminal of the specific electronic component is soldered from the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the specific through-hole does not allow electrical continuity between the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and when the terminal of the specific electronic component is soldered from the soldering surface, the solder does not reach the mounting surface. In this case, it is possible to prevent the solder from rising too much toward the mounting surface on which the electronic component is mounted and causing a problem.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the terminals for fixing the specific electronic parts (fixing terminals 1 and 2) are inserted into the specific through holes and soldered. According to such a configuration, the specific through-holes are soldered to the specific through-holes for fixing the specific electronic component (fixing terminals 1 and 2), so that the solder reaches the mounting surface. By not doing so, problems do not occur even if the electrical connection becomes weak.

In addition, the game control board of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the terminals (fixing terminals 1 and 2) for fixing the specific electronic parts are inserted into the specific through holes and soldered. Terminals (connecting terminals) that propagate signals and power of components may be inserted and soldered. It is possible to prevent problems caused by short-circuiting of a terminal that propagates a signal or power of a specific electronic component with another terminal.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the model number of the specific electronic component is displayed (printed or stamped) above the terminals (fixing terminals 1 and 2). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the model number of the specific electronic part from being hidden due to excessive solder rising to the mounting surface side where the electronic component is mounted.

Although the third embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this third embodiment, and any changes or additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. In addition, the same or similar configurations as those of the first and second embodiments have the same effects as those described in the first and second embodiments. Moreover, the modifications illustrated in the first and second embodiments are also applicable to the third embodiment.

(Invention of characteristic part 053SG)
As described above, the characteristic portion 053SG includes the following inventions. That is, conventionally, for example, as described in JP-A-2016-93428, etc., game machines such as pachinko game machines and slot machines generally have a board on which electronic devices are mounted, A substrate of this type has been proposed in which data is input/output using a single data bus between control means such as a CPU and other electronic equipment. In this type of substrate, there are various problems regarding the design of wiring patterns. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a game machine in which the wiring pattern of the board is preferably formed, the game machine of (1) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The input circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the output circuit.
According to this feature, the input circuit that transmits input data based on the input signal from the electronic component used for controlling the control means to the control means outputs to the electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means. Since the data bus is connected so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the output circuit for outputting the signal, it is possible to prevent the input data from being affected by noise or the like.

The gaming machine (2) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to (1),
The substrate (game control substrate) is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface), and the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from electronic components on the data bus.

The gaming machine of (3) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The data bus, the input circuit, and the output circuit are connected through a through-hole to a surface (mounting surface) opposite to the surface on which the data bus is formed (solder surface) by a branched wiring pattern. Characterized by
According to this feature, since the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, the influence of noise can be reduced.
The gaming machine of (4) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3),
Connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from the outside of the board are mounted near one side (upper side) of the board (game control board), and the data bus is connected to the board (game control board). It is characterized in that it is formed in a region near the other side (lower side) facing the one side of the control board).
According to this feature, since an area for mounting electronic components such as an input circuit and an output circuit can be secured between the connector and the data bus, the board area can be effectively utilized.

The gaming machine of (5) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4),
A performance indicator for displaying the performance of the game machine is mounted on the board (game control board),
The output circuit (third output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the performance indicator is more likely than the output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to another indicator. (microcomputer) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern is short.
According to this feature, the output circuit for outputting the output signal to the performance indicator has a shorter wiring pattern up to the control means than the output circuit for outputting the output signal to the other indicators. It is possible to make it difficult to illegally alter the display content by arranging the

The gaming machine of (6) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5),
The input circuit and the output circuit are mounted on the board so that the components are oriented in different directions.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily grasp the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit.

The gaming machine of (7) of the characteristic part 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6),
The data bus is connected to the noise elimination circuit at a position closer to the control means (game control microcomputer) than the input circuit and the output circuit.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the control means.

The game machine of (8) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The output circuit outputs to the first electronic component (first output component) that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) A first output circuit (first output circuit) for outputting a signal, and a second electronic component (second a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the second output component),
The first output circuit (first output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the second output circuit (second output circuit) It is characterized by being
According to this feature, the first output circuit that outputs the output signal to the first electronic component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game is connected to the second electronic component that displays the display according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since the wiring pattern to the control means is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of the second output circuit for outputting the output signal, the output data is affected by noise and the like, so that the output data can move according to the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the operation of the unit from being affected.

The game machine of (9) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The board (game control board) has electronic components mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface), and the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface), and is connected from the data bus through through holes. The first wiring pattern (wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit) for outputting the wiring pattern on the first surface (mounting surface) according to the progress of the game on the first surface (mounting surface). and a second wiring pattern (wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal) for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device.
According to this feature, the wiring pattern on the first surface connected to the data bus formed on the second surface through the through-hole is used to output the output according to the progress of the game on the first surface side. Since the output signal corresponding to the wiring pattern and the progress of the game is branched to the second wiring pattern for outputting to the external device, it is formed on the second surface to branch to the first wiring pattern and the second wiring pattern respectively. Since there is no need to branch from the data bus to the first surface side, the wiring pattern can be formed simply.

The game machine of (10) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
A first input for transmitting input data based on an input signal from a first electronic component (first input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) to the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from a circuit (first input circuit) and a second electronic component (second input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) is input to the control means (game control A second input circuit (second input circuit) to be transmitted to a microcomputer), and a third electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) (first output component, second output an output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the component),
The first input circuit (first input circuit) and the output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) are connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) via the data bus,
The second input circuit (second input circuit) is connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) without passing through the data bus.
According to this feature, the input data based on the input signal from the second electronic component is transmitted to the control means without passing through the data bus through which the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Therefore, input data based on important input signals can be transmitted to the control means without being affected by input data from other input circuits or output data to the output circuit.

The game machine of (11) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the input circuit.
According to this feature, the output circuit for outputting an output signal to the electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means outputs the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component used for controlling the control means. Since the wiring pattern to the control means is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the input circuit for transmission to the control means, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like.

The game machine of (12) of the characteristic part 053SG is
A game machine capable of playing,
Control means (game control microcomputer) and electronic components (input components) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) Input data based on input signals from the control means (game control microcomputer) ), and an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) is mounted. , equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. including a data bus that
The output circuit outputs to the first electronic component (first output component) that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer) A first output circuit (first output circuit) for outputting a signal, and a second electronic component (second a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the second output component),
The second output circuit (second output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than the first output circuit (first output circuit) It is characterized by being
According to this feature, the second output circuit for outputting an output signal to the second electronic component that performs display according to the progress of the game is connected to the first electronic component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since the wiring pattern to the control means is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the first output circuit for outputting the output signal, the output data is affected by noise and the like, so that the display corresponding to the progress of the game is displayed. can be prevented from affecting

In the above embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is exemplified as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of balls circulated and lent out according to the player's request for lending and the number of prize balls awarded according to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine. Since scores and points are given to the player instead of game balls in these enclosed type game machines, the given scores and points correspond to game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example of a gaming machine. In addition, one game is completed by deriving a variable display result to a variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of individually identifiable symbols, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be generated.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines, slot machines, etc., in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Also, the gaming machine capable of playing a game is at least one that performs a game, and is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, and may be a general gaming machine.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if it is modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention.

Moreover, among the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modified example, and the configurations shown in later-described embodiment examples and each modified example, all or part of the configurations may be arbitrarily combined.

In addition, it should be considered that the above-mentioned embodiment disclosed this time and the below-mentioned form are examples in all respects, and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention also includes a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a game medium (for example, a game A storage portion (for example, a ball tank forming portion 201) capable of storing a ball P), a payout portion (for example, a payout device 200) capable of paying out game media, and a top surface of which is open so that a game in the storage portion can be played. a guide passage forming portion (for example, a first guide passage forming portion 202 and a second guide passage forming portion 204) that forms a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage and a second guide passage) that guides the medium to the dispensing portion; , a cover portion (for example, the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, the third cover body 330) provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion; and a display means (for example, a pachinko game The machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5, etc.), and the guide passage formation of the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) dropped on the cover portion Predetermined restricting portions (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, grooves 326A to 326C, and recessed portions 336) are provided (see FIGS. 22 and 24) to restrict falling into the guide passage forming portion. A plurality of specific restricting portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) are provided for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion to the dispensing portion (see FIGS. 11, 12, and 27). , the predetermined restricting portion includes a first retention portion (eg, a long hole 316A to 316C) and a second retention portion (eg, grooves 326A to 326C), and the second retention portion is closer to the dispensing portion (eg, dispensing device 200) than the first retention portion. larger than the first retention portion (L22B>L21), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and an area around the first display area that is larger than the first display area. a narrow second display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area surrounding the first display area 20SH51 and narrower than the first display area 20SH51); display area 20SH52, etc.), and the display means can display a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 is the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20S In H52, a background image corresponding to the jackpot gaming state can be displayed, etc.), in the second display area, in front of the background image, a grant amount display regarding the grant amount of the given game value is displayed. display is possible (for example, the image display device 5 is capable of displaying, in the second display area 20SH52, the winning number display 20SHK related to the number of awarded balls in front of the background image, etc.), and at least the first In the 1 display area, on the front side of the background image, as a notification display for notifying that the amount of given game value has reached a predetermined amount, it is notified that the amount of given game value has reached a first predetermined amount. and a second notification display that notifies that the amount of game value provided has reached the second predetermined amount (for example, the image display device 5 can display at least the first display area In 20SH51, on the front side of the background image, the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state is displayed as a winning number notification display 20SHKH for notifying that the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "Kiriban". When the number of winning balls reaches "1000", it is possible to display "1000 over", and "2000 over" when the number of awarded balls reaches "2000" in the jackpot game state. and the display of the number of acquisitions can be displayed), and the display of the awarded amount is updated each time the game value is awarded in the advantageous state (for example, the display of the number of acquisitions 20 SHK is displayed in the jackpot gaming state. (updated each time a ball is paid out as a prize ball, etc.), and the notification display ends when a specific period of time has elapsed since the display started (for example, the number of acquisition notification display 20SHKH is displayed. such as ending the display when a predetermined period of time has passed since the start), and the characters used for the notification display are characters of a size larger than the characters used for the display of the amount to be given (for example, the number of acquisitions notification The characters used for the display 20SHKH should be larger than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK, etc.), and the characters used for the display of the amount to be applied and the notification display should be surrounded by lines forming the characters. (For example, the characters used in the acquired number display 20SHK and the acquired number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. etc.), the specific characters used for the display of the amount to be applied are from the specific area to the The background image is not visible (for example, the specific character used for the acquired number display 20SHK means that the background image is not visible from the specific area, etc.), and the specific character used for the notification display is the specific area. (For example, the background image can be visually recognized from a specific area of the specific character used for the acquisition count notification display 20SHKH).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion. Further, it is possible to prevent the threaded member that has entered the guide passage forming portion from entering the delivery portion. In addition, since the screw member tends to be retained in the retaining portion as it approaches the dispensing portion, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from moving and falling into the guide passage forming portion. In addition, the display including the specific characters can be preferably displayed in relation to the background image.

In other words, it is possible to make the game machine less likely to break down by preventing the screw member from falling and being mixed in the guide passage forming portion and the payout portion, and at the same time, the specific character used for the amount to be awarded can be used for the game in an advantageous state. It is updated each time a value is given, and the background image is made invisible from the specific area surrounded by the lines that form the characters, and the characters used for the notification display are more than the characters used for the value display. Since the characters are large and the background image can be seen from a specific area, the applied amount display can always be easily confirmed even though the characters are small. The background image can be displayed without hiding it. That is, it is possible to provide a game machine that is less likely to break down when installed in a game arcade and allows a player to easily grasp the amount of game value to be provided and to easily recognize that the predetermined amount has been reached.

Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the screw member from falling into the guide passage forming portion and the payout portion, and to display the display including the specific characters appropriately in relation to the background image. As a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, etc.), and a display means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 The display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area surrounding the first display area and narrower than the first display area. and (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51, a second display area 20SH52 surrounding the first display area 20SH51 and narrower than the first display area 20SH51, and the like), and the display means can display a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 can display a background image corresponding to the first display area). In the area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52, a background image corresponding to the jackpot game state can be displayed, etc.), in the second display area, in front of the background image, the given game value It is possible to display a given amount display related to the given amount. etc.), at least in the first display area, on the front side of the background image, as a notification display for notifying that the amount of game value to be given has reached a predetermined amount, the amount of game value to be given is the first place It is possible to display a first notification display for notifying that the fixed amount has been reached, and a second notification display for notifying that the amount of game value provided has reached the second predetermined amount (for example, the image display device 5 , at least in the first display area 20SH51, in front of the background image, the winning number notification display 20SHKH for notifying that the number of prize balls given in the big win game state has reached the number of "Kiriban" is displayed in the big win game state. When the number of awarded balls reaches ``1000'', it is possible to display the obtained number notification display of ``over 1000'', and the number of awarded balls reaches ``2000'' in the jackpot game state. (e.g., it is possible to display an acquisition number notification display such as "over 2000" when the number of rewards is increased). It is updated each time a value is given (for example, the winning number display 20SHK is updated each time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in a jackpot game state, etc.), and the notification display is started after the display is started. The display is terminated when a specific period of time has passed (for example, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH ends the display when a predetermined period of time has passed since the display started), and the characters used for the notification display are , The characters are larger than the characters used for the display of the given amount (for example, the characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are larger than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK, etc.) , The characters used for the given amount display and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed (for example, used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH (e.g., a character includes a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the character is formed), and the specific character used for the application amount display is such that the background image cannot be visually recognized from the specific area. (For example, the specific characters used for the acquired number display 20SHK indicate that the background image cannot be visually recognized from a specific area, etc.). (For example, the specific character used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is such that the background image can be visually recognized from a specific area). An example of the form of these gaming machines will be described below as another form.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 31 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 33). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 31, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable prize winning ball device 7 has a special prize winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 33), and the special winning prize opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special prize winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 31, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. As shown, the frame lamps 9b include a lower left lamp 9bL1 in the lower left portion, an upper left lamp 9bL2 in the upper left portion, a lower right lamp 9bR1 in the lower right portion, and an upper right lamp 9bR2 in the upper right portion. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. As shown in FIG. Further, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR are provided corresponding to the speaker 8L and 8R portions, respectively. Below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, a display device lower lamp 9f is provided. There is Further, in the vicinity of the general winning openings 10 provided at the lower left three places of the game area, general winning opening vicinity lamps 9g are provided.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 31), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR, the display device lower lamp 9f, and the general prize winning opening vicinity lamp 9g are collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. There is The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f, and general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g are configured to include LEDs.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 33).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 33).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

32 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main board 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11 , and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29 . The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls awarded to the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls awarded to the large prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long square frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side of the substrate case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 500Aa and long pieces 500Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is defined by timing of elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29.5 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is. In the jackpot game state, so-called right-handed hitting is performed to shoot the game ball to the game area on the right side so as to enter the game ball into the big prize hole formed by the special variable ball game device 7 .

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the movement of the movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combinations described later, the decorative symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed are variably displayed. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stop-displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special game is a "small hit", the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 is a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined small winning combination (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot type of jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes "small hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display or active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

Even during the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed for informing the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. In addition, even during the small winning game state, the effect during the small winning to report the small winning game state is executed. In addition, during the small-hit game state, some of the big-hit types (in the big-hit type of the big-hit game state in the same manner as the small-hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in which the subsequent game state is a high probability state) By executing a common effect in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is the small winning game state or the big winning game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win game state and after the end of the big win game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, and a launch control substrate are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the power supply board 17 can supply power from an AC 100V external power supply such as a commercial power supply to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have it.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch provided on the power supply substrate 17 is pressed.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 31 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Sound output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signal and lamp signal, etc.), and control of movable body 32 (supply of signal for operating movable body 32, etc.) are executed by effect control CPU 120. You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 34, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.) register setting, and setting to make the RAM 102 accessible.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not established. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S4), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if it is possible to restart the fluctuation of the design.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), after executing the initialization process (step S6), the setting change process (step S7) is executed. The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the OFF state is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is established in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the setting is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop-display a lost symbol or the like, or to perform a display corresponding to a game stop state different from the lost symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a game hall staff member or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the step The setting change process of S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery processing of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flow chart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 35 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of start winning set to be transmitted in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern), the form of variable display of the decorative pattern (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative pattern It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when the time saving state or probability variable state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting a round in the jackpot gaming state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is a "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of a round in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the number of executions reaches the upper limit execution number. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending production as a production operation for informing the end of the jackpot game state has passed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing is terminated.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

The process during the small hit opening of step S119 is performed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the set value consists of 6 levels from 1 to 6, 6 being the highest probability of winning the big win, and the smaller the value is in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2 and 1, the lower the probability of winning the big win. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 37 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table. Figure 37 (A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variation special figure is the first special figure, and Figure 37 (B) shows that the variation special figure is the second special figure. It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result determination table, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), "big hit" special figure display assigned to the result. Thereby, when it is a high probability state such as a probability variable state in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability that it is determined to control to a big hit game state is higher than when it is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. get higher

In the first special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or set value, the probability of determining that the special figure display result is "small win" and controlled to the small win game state is determined to be the same value. has been assigned a value. In the second special figure display result determination table, regardless of the game state or setting value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the first special figure display result Determination values are assigned so as to be the same values different from those in the determination table. In addition, depending on the set value, the probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as the "small hit" may be changed. The probability that the special figure display result is controlled to the small winning game state as "small hit" regardless of the variation special figure may be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment value is set regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to set value 6 are set. In this case, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judging. When the set value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to the "jackpot", only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the first special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 in the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is a small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state is a variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination value is the set value Regardless, it is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value, regardless of whether the set value is 1-6. This prevents the numerical range of the small-hit determination value from overlapping the range of the big-hit determination value that varies according to each set value.

The number of set values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁For example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball during the jackpot game is a predetermined value provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. While controlling the game state after the end of the jackpot game to a probability variable state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V variable probability type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time reduction control). A game property (a so-called one-type two-type mixed type) that controls a big hit game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 may be employed. When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the game performance is the same, but the big win probability and small win probability are higher than when these set values are any one of 1 to 3. A setting in which the probability is high and the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 4 to 6) may be provided. A common switch may be used for different purposes when the playability is changed according to the set value. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes through a prescribed area). switch), and when the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is a game switch (for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 38 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, a CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt prohibition state is used, the interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command receiving buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command receiving buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process process of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 38 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 39, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The process of waiting for the start of variable display in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. Thereafter, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during a small hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. After that, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small winning end production process is ended.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this jackpot middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the effect contents in the big win game state, and executes various effect control in the big win game state based on the set contents. Further, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is changed to "7", which is the value corresponding to the ending production process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big win game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the big win game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above is a payout type game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize based on the occurrence of a prize, but instead, the game media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of a prize. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

In addition, the game can be executed not only by loading a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, it includes a ratio of "0%" for one and a ratio of "100%" or less than "100%" for the other.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 042AK)
Next, the game machine in the characterizing portion 042AK of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 40-1 to 40-21. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 042AK of the present embodiment starts displaying the number of winning balls after a predetermined period of time when the attacker becomes open in the first round game, and the attacker wins within the predetermined period. If not, a predetermined display indicating that the number of winning balls is not increased is performed, and if the attacker wins within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is performed. Hereinafter, the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 042AK having such characteristics will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as those described in the basic description above will be omitted.

FIG. 40-1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, and includes a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d. , speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR, the lower display lamp 9f (the lower left lamp 9fL, the lower right lamp 9fR), and the general winning gate vicinity lamp 9g are all lit. It is a diagram. In the characteristic portion 042AK of the present embodiment, which will be described later in detail, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d. , speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, lower display device lamp 9f (left display device lower lamp 9fL, right display device lower lamp 9fR), general prize winning gate vicinity lamp 9g, etc. are sequentially lit from the lower left to the lower right. It is possible to suggest to the player that he/she should hit to the right by allowing the player to hit the ball to the right.

FIG. 40-2 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 36 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 40-2, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step 042AKS001). At this time, if the jackpot flag is ON (step 042AKS001; Yes), the waiting time for the effect at the start of jackpot is set (step 042AKS002). For example, in the process of step 042AKS002, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the waiting time for the effect at the start of the big win may be set in the game control process timer provided in the RAM102.

Following the processing of step 042AKS002, settings are made for transmitting a winning start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS003). For example, in the processing of step 042AKS003, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the winning start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the winning start designation command is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. should be stored in After that, the jackpot flag is cleared to be turned off (step 042AKS004). In addition, the setting for ending the variable probability state and the time saving state is performed (step 042AKS005). For example, in step 042AKS005, the process of clearing the probability variation flag and the time saving flag to turn it off, and the processing of clearing the special figure variation counter for counting the number of times the special figure game is executed in the probability variation state and the time saving state It should be executed. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "4" corresponding to the large winning opening pre-opening process (step 042AKS006), the special symbol stop process is terminated.

When the big hit flag is off at step 042AKS001 (step 042AKS001; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step 042AKS007). At this time, if the small hit flag is ON (step 042AKS007; No), the effect waiting time at the start of the small hit is set (step 042AKS008). For example, in the process of step 042AKS008, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the effect waiting time at the start of a small hit may be set in the game control process timer.

Following the processing of step 042AKS008, similarly to the processing of step 042AKS003, settings are made for transmitting the winning start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS009). After that, the small hit flag is cleared to be turned off (step 042AKS010). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8" which is a value corresponding to the small hit opening preprocessing (step 042AKS011).

Also, when the small hit flag is off at step 042AKS007 (step 042AKS007; No), the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0" which is the value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 042AKS012). . After executing either step 042AKS011 or step 042AKS012 processing, it is determined whether or not to terminate the variable probability state or the time saving state (step 042AKS013). For example, in the process of step 042AKS003, the value of the special figure fluctuation number counter (special figure fluctuation number count value) is updated by, for example, subtracting 1 or adding 1, and the special figure fluctuation number count value after the update is predetermined. It is determined whether or not it matches the special game state end determination value. At this time, if it matches the special game state end determination value, by clearing the variable probability flag and the time saving flag to turn it off, the variable probability state and the time saving state may be ended and controlled to the normal state. On the other hand, if it does not match the special game state end determination value, the state of the variable probability flag and the time saving flag may be maintained and the processing of step 042AKS013 may be ended. After executing the end determination of such probability variation state and time saving state, the special symbol stop processing is ended. In addition, the end determination based on the special figure variation count value is performed only when it is a time saving state, and the probability variation state may be continued until the next variable display result becomes "big hit" . Alternatively, for example, from a random counter provided in the RAM 102, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the end of the probability variable state is extracted, and by referring to the probability variable state end determination table stored in advance in the ROM 101 etc., the probability variable state is terminated. You may make it determine whether to carry out.

FIG. 40-3 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S114 of FIG. 36 as the jackpot opening pre-processing. In the jackpot opening preprocessing shown in FIG. 40-3, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot start flag is ON (step 042AKS021). Here, the jackpot start time flag is set to the ON state in response to the jackpot flag being ON in the special symbol stop processing of step S113 shown in FIG. If the jackpot start flag is ON at step 042AKS021 (step 042AKS021; Yes), it is determined whether or not the game is waiting for the jackpot start effect (step 042AKS022). As an example, in the special symbol stop processing of step S113 shown in FIG. 33, when the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", the predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the waiting time for the production at the start of the big hit is It is set in the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S312, in response to the fact that the game control process timer value does not match the predetermined waiting time elapsing determination value (for example, "0", etc.), it is determined that the effect is waiting for the start of the big hit. , it may be determined that it is not in standby for the performance at the start of the big win in response to the coincidence.

If in step 042AKS022 waiting for the jackpot start effect, step 042AKS022; Yes), for example, after updating the game control process timer value by subtracting 1 (step 042AKS023), the jackpot opening pre-processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is not waiting for the big win start effect at step 042AKS022 (step 042AKS022; No), the big win start time flag is cleared (step 042AKS024) and the big win opening opening number counter is cleared. Then (step 042AKS025), the jackpot type buffer value stored in the RAM 102 is read (step 042AKS026), and the opening control pattern corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value is set. In the feature part 042AK of the present embodiment, a common open control pattern is set regardless of the jackpot type. An opening control pattern different from the type may be set. Also, even if the jackpot type is "probable variation" or "non-probability variation", for example, different opening control patterns are set depending on the jackpot type of "probability variation 1" and "probability variation 2", etc. Different opening control depending on the jackpot type May be set in a pattern.

After executing the processing of step 042AKS026, it is determined whether or not the game is waiting until the opening of the big winning opening in the next round (waiting for next opening) (step 042AKS027). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS027, it is determined whether or not the game control process timer value matches the next open standby end determination value, and if it does not match, it is determined that it is waiting for the next open, while if it matches If so, it can be determined that it is not waiting for the next opening. If it is waiting for the next opening at step 042AKS027 (step 042AKS027; Yes), it proceeds to step 042AKS023 and updates the game control process timer value. In addition, the game control process timer value updated at step 042AKS023 is the time set as the waiting time at the start of the jackpot at step 042AKS002 shown in FIG. This is the time set as the interval time between each round.

If it is determined that the next opening is not in progress at step 042AKS027 (step 042AKS027; No), the big winning hole is opened according to the set opening control pattern and the count value of the big winning hole opening number counter. (Step 042AKS028). As an example, in the processing of step 042AKS028, a timer initial value predetermined corresponding to the large winning opening opening time is set in the game control process timer, etc., and the special variable winning ball device 7 forms a large winning prize. A special winning opening opening time is set as the upper limit of the time during which the opening is kept open. In addition, for example, when a solenoid drive signal to a predetermined large winning opening door solenoid is started to be output via a predetermined solenoid circuit, the large winning opening door solenoid for opening the large winning opening is turned on. state is set.

At this time, for example, when the count value of the large winning opening opening number counter is any of "1" to "15", the timer initial value corresponding to 29.5 seconds as the large winning opening opening time is set to the game control process timer. is set to

Then, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a designation command during opening of the big winning opening to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS029). After executing the process of step 042AKS029, the count value of the number of times the big winning opening is opened is updated by adding 1 (step 042AKS030), and the value of the special figure process flag is set to a value corresponding to the big hit open process. After updating to 5″ (step 042AKS031), the big winning opening pre-opening process is ended.

FIG. 40-4 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S115 of FIG. 36 as the process during jackpot opening. In the jackpot opening process shown in FIG. 40-4, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the game ball has entered the big winning opening by, for example, determining whether or not the count switch 23 is turned on. (Step 042AKS041). At step 042AKS041, if there is no winning of the game ball into the big winning hole (step 042AKS041; No), the process proceeds to step 042AKS044.

On the other hand, at step 042AKS041, if there is a winning of the game ball into the big winning hole (step 042AKS041; Yes), the CPU 103 adds 1 to the winning number count value and updates it, and the game ball enters the big winning hole. A setting is made to transmit a prize designation command indicating that a prize has been won from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS042). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the updated winning prize number count value has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 042AKS043). If the winning number count value does not reach the predetermined number (step 042AKS043; No), after the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 (step 042AKS044), for example, the game control process timer value corresponds to 29.5 seconds. It is determined whether or not 29.5 seconds have passed since the opening of the big winning opening, depending on whether or not the timer value is matched (step 042AKS045). At this time, if 29.5 seconds have not elapsed (step 042AKS045; No), the processing during the opening of the big winning opening is terminated.

If it is determined in step 042AKS043 that the updated winning number count value has reached the predetermined number (step 042AKS043; Yes), or if 29.5 seconds have passed since the large winning opening was opened in step 042AKS045 (Step 042AKS043; Yes), for example, by stopping the output of a solenoid drive signal to a predetermined solenoid for the door of the large winning opening via a predetermined solenoid circuit, the large winning opening is closed. (step 042AKS046), and clear the winning number count value (step 042AKS047).

After executing the process of step 042AKS047, the setting for transmitting the specified command after opening the large winning opening is made to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS048), and the value of the special figure process flag is changed after opening the large winning opening. After updating to "6" which is the value corresponding to the process (step 042AKS049), the process during big hit opening is ended.

In this way, special symbol stop processing shown in Figure 40-2, big hit opening pre-processing shown in Figure 40-3, big hit opening process shown in Figure 40-4, etc. (including jackpot opening post-processing and jackpot end processing) is executed, the transmission setting of various effect control commands such as a winning start designation command, a large winning mouth opening designation command, a winning designation command, and a large winning mouth opening designation command is performed. Then, the command control process of step S27 in FIG. 35 is executed, and the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12, so that the effect control board 12 side , timings such as the start of the big win, the opening (start of the round) and closing (end of the round) of the big win, the winning of the big win and the end of the big win.

FIG. 40-5 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing performed in the effect processing during the big hit in step S176 of FIG. 39 as various display processing. In the various display processes shown in FIG. 40-5, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a hit end designation command is received (step 042AKS051). When it is determined that the number of executions of the round in which the big winning opening is opened reaches the set upper limit number of executions in the jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 in FIG. It is a command transmitted from the side of 11, and is a command for ending the effect during the big hit and executing the ending effect.

If it is determined that the hit end designation command has not been received (step 042AKS051; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether a predetermined period has elapsed since the nR was started (elapsed of the nR predetermined period). Determine (step 042AKS052). Note that n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, and its initial value is "1" and is incremented one by one in the process of step 042AKS066, which will be described later, and is cleared to "1" in step 042AKS068. The predetermined period is 0.6 seconds, which is set as a timer value at the start of the round game. When the timer value becomes "0", it may be determined that the predetermined period has passed since the nR-th round started. More specifically, from the side of the main board 11 in response to the fact that the large winning opening is completely open (detection that the large winning opening door has moved to the position where it is completely open) A designated command during the opening of the big winning opening is transmitted, and counting of a timer value for a predetermined period may be started from the timing when the command is received.

In addition, in the characterizing part 042AK of the present embodiment, as will be described later, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the round game of the first round is started, the obtained number display indicating the number of obtained balls and the round indicating the number of rounds are displayed. display is performed. On the side of the performance control board 12, during the period from the big win to the end (the period from the fanfare to the ending), every time a winning designation command indicating that a game ball has won a prize in the big winning opening is received, the winning number is obtained. is continuously added by 15. On the side of the effect control board 12, when the winning designation command is received, it is necessary to first analyze the command, add the winning number, and display the added winning number. It takes a predetermined period of time to display. Therefore, if the predetermined period is too short, the series of processes will not be completed in time for the wins from the start of the first round game until the predetermined period elapses, and "0000" will be displayed as the number of wins. , the process of displaying "0015" may not keep up with the process of displaying "0015" despite winning ("0000" is displayed and then "0015" is displayed, giving the player a sense of discomfort). Therefore, in the characterizing part 042AK of the present embodiment, 0.6 seconds is provided as a predetermined period, and when the game ball existing in the upper part of the big winning opening at the opening timing wins from the opening until the number of rounds is displayed In addition, a period is secured in which "0015" is directly displayed without "0000" being displayed as the display of the number of acquisitions. On the other hand, in the characterizing portion 042AK of the present embodiment, the predetermined period is set to 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval in the case of continuous firing. Taking this into consideration, the time interval required for the continuously shot game balls to enter the big winning opening is the shooting interval. Therefore, the number of winnings in the big winning opening is one after the opening of the big winning opening until the number of wins is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to an increase in the winning number display at the timing when the round number display is started due to an increase in the winning number in the state before the winning number display and the round number display are performed. can do. Although the predetermined period in the characterizing portion 042AK of the present embodiment is 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval, the predetermined period is not limited to 0.6 seconds and may be changed as appropriate.

When it is determined that the predetermined period has not passed after starting the nR (step 042AKS052; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether n=1, that is, whether it is the first round. Determine (step 042AKS053). n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, and is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. As described above, the initial value is "1", and incremented by 1 in step 042AKS066, and "1" is reached in step 042AKS068. cleared to In the process of step 042AKS053, it is determined whether or not n=1 by checking the value of n.

When it is determined that n=1 (step 042AKS053; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs a right-handed effect to suggest that the player should hit to the right, and suggests that a big hit game state has occurred. The operation control of the fanfare effect is performed (step 042AKS054). On the other hand, when it is determined that n≠1 (step 042AKS053; No), the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the n−1R and the number of acquisitions, and also displays the number of rounds corresponding to the n−1R. (step 042AKS055). In the processing of step 042AKS055, for example, when n=2, the round display indicating that it is the first round and the number of wins are displayed, and the action control during the big hit corresponding to the first round is performed. In the process of step 042AKS055, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 as a performance during the big win, and the game effect lamp 9 is illuminated in a pattern corresponding to the performance during the big win, and predetermined music and voice are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. It suffices if an effect of outputting The light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the big win effect may be set in advance.

After executing the processing of step 042AKS054 or step 042AKS055, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a winning designation command is received, that is, whether or not a game ball has won a prize in a large winning opening (step 042AKS056). In addition, in the process of step 042AKS056, the prize winning is determined for a predetermined period from the start of the nR. When the winning designation command is not received (step 042AKS056; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the various display processes as it is.

When the winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning to the big winning opening within a predetermined period after the start of the nR (step 042AKS056; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 counts the number of winning balls. is added by "15" (step 042AKS057). The count value of the number of winning balls is stored in advance in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 with an initial value of "0", and is added by "15" by the processing of step 042AKS057 and the processing of step 042AKS063 to be described later. The number of acquired balls is continuously counted during the so-called continuous game, and is cleared to "0" at the timing when the time-saving control ends without the variable display result becoming a "jackpot", that is, at the end timing of the continuous game. . After executing the process of step 042AKS057, the effect control CPU 120 causes the attacker lamp 9c to emit light and outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning (step 042AKS058). It should be noted that the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the processing of step 042AKS058 (the same applies to step 042AKS064) is, for example, a mode (winning The light is emitted in a manner to notify that the Therefore, it becomes easy to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning hole, and the interest in the game can be improved. Regarding the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c, the number of times of light emission per unit time at the time of winning may be larger than that at the time of the jackpot effect. When a game ball wins in the big winning hole, regardless of whether the winning is within a predetermined period or not, in addition to lighting the attacker lamp 9c, a winning sound is output. Therefore, it is easy to recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning slot, and the game amusement can be improved.

After executing the process of step 042AKS058, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not n=1, that is, whether or not it is the first round (first R) in the same manner as step 042AKS053 (step 042AKS059 ). If n=1, that is, if it is the first round (step 042AKS059; Yes), various display processes are terminated. On the other hand, if n.noteq.1, that is, if it is not the first round (step 042AKS059; No), the count value of the number of winning balls added at step 042AKS057 is displayed (display the number of winning), and the number of winning is displayed. After updating the display (step 042AKS060), various display processes are terminated. It should be noted that in the characterizing part 042AK of the present embodiment, when the acquired number update display is performed in the processing of step 042AKS060, instead of displaying the count value of the number of acquired balls that was added in step 042AKS057 as it is, As shown in 12(a-23), after performing a count-up display (notifying display that the number of acquisitions is increasing), the number of acquisitions is displayed. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the increase in the number of winning balls, and the interest in the game can be improved.

When it is determined that a predetermined period has elapsed after starting the nR at step 042AKS052 in FIG. 40-5 (step 042AKS052; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the nR and the number of acquisitions. , and, at the same time, the operation control of the effect during the nR-th big hit is performed (step 042AKS061). If n=1, that is, if it is the first round, the display of the number of rounds and the number of acquisitions is performed for the first time in step 042AKS061. In this case, if there is a win before the lapse of the predetermined period, the number of wins is updated and displayed at step 042AKS061. Specifically, when the game ball wins the big winning hole before the predetermined period elapses, the winning number is added by "15" at step 042AKS057. ) as shown in Figure 40-11 (a-21), the number of wins has not increased since the count-up display (notification display that the number of wins is increasing) is performed. Display the number of wins (display of "0015") that is different from the predetermined display indicating (as a specific display) (You can do this after uploading.) On the other hand, if the game ball has not entered the big winning hole before the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the winning number remains "0" and the winning number has not increased in the current big hit. -22), as a predetermined display, display of the number of winnings (display of "0000") indicating that the number of winnings has not increased (in the case of consecutive games, the number of winnings at the time of the previous big win is displayed); display). In addition to "0000", the number of acquisitions (predetermined display) indicating that the number of acquisitions has not increased may be a display other than a number, such as "----" or "not increased". You may do so. Further, in step 042AKS061, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5 as an effect during the big win, and the game effect lamp 9 is illuminated in a pattern corresponding to the effect during the big win, and predetermined music and voice are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. It suffices if an effect of outputting The light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the big win effect may be set in advance. In this way, during a predetermined period after the big winning hole is opened, that is, in a situation where the winning number is not displayed, the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the game ball enters the big winning hole. However, in a situation where the number of acquisitions after the lapse of the predetermined period is displayed, the effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-game machine frame 3 and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately displayed. , and the production effect lamp 9 emits more light than during the predetermined period. Therefore, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game without giving the player a sense of unease. The production can be livened up and the amusement of the game can be improved. In addition, since the performance effect lamp 9 is lighted at the same timing as the execution timing of the performance during the big win, the performance can be livened up at once at the timing when the performance during the big win is executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

After executing the processing of step 042AKS061, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a winning designation command is received, that is, whether or not a game ball has won a prize in a large winning opening (step 042AKS062). When the winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning to the big winning opening (step 042AKS062; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 adds "15" to the count value of the number of winning balls (step 042AKS063), The attacking card 9c is illuminated, a winning sound corresponding to the winning is output, a count-up display (notifying display that the winning number increases) is performed, and then the winning number update display is performed to display the winning number. (Step 042AKS064).

After executing the processing of step 042AKS064, or when the winning designation command is not received at step 042AKS062 (step 042AKS062; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the n+1R which is the next round of the nR has started. It is determined whether or not (step 042AKS065). In step 042AKS065, for example, it may be determined by whether or not a special winning opening open specification command indicating the start of the (n+1)th R is received from the main board 11 side. When the n+1R has not started, that is, when the command for specifying during the opening of the big winning opening is not received and the nR remains (step 042AKS065; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends various display processes as it is. . On the other hand, when the n+1R starts, that is, when the large winning opening open specification command indicating the start of the n+1R is received (step 042AKS065; Yes), n is incremented by "1" (step 042AKS066) and then various display processes exit. For example, if n=1, ie the first round, then n=2 at step 042AKS066. Although n=2 and this is the second round, it is determined as No in steps 042AKS052 and 053 until the predetermined period has elapsed, and in step 042AKS055, it corresponds to the first round which is n-1R. A round display is performed, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a round display corresponding to the second round, which is the nR-th round, is performed (displayed in the processing of step 042AKS061 after determination of Yes in step 042AKS052).

If it is determined at step 042AKS051 that the hit end designation command has been received (step 042AKS051; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the end of the big hit effect corresponding to the round in order to perform the ending effect (step 042AKS067), clear n to 1 (step 042AKS068), and terminate various display processes.

Next, the display timing of the display of the number of rounds, the display of the number of wins, etc., and examples of effect operations will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 40-6 to 40-14. Note that the illustrated example shows a case of a so-called first win (first big win) instead of a consecutive game.

FIG. 40-6 is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big winning opening, the timing of various displays, and the like. 40-7 to 40-14 are diagrams showing an example of effect operation display, the opening/closing state of the big winning opening, and the lighting state of various lamps on the image display device 5. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 40-6 and 40-7 (a-1), when a combination of decoration symbols constituting a big win is stopped and displayed, a big win game state is entered. At this stage, as shown in FIG. 40-7(b-1), the big winning opening is closed. Also, in order to inform the player of the big hit, as shown in FIG. Various production effect lamps 9 such as 9eR, the lower lamp 9f of the display device, and the general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g are turned on. In the illustrated example, the upper stage is the effect lamp 9 provided on the game machine frame 3 and the lower stage is the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 .

When the jackpot hits, as shown in FIG. 40-6, during the period until the predetermined period of the first round ends, a right-handed performance and a fanfare performance are performed to inform the player that the player should hit right (FIG. 40-6). 5 step 042AKS054). The period from the big hit to the start of the 1st R shown in FIG. 40-6 is sufficiently longer than the predetermined period. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 40-7(a-2), a fanfare effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. All the production effect lamps 9 are turned off once. Then, the performance effect lamps 9 are turned on in order from the lower left side to the upper left side, the center portion, the upper right side, and the lower right side, and a right-handed performance is performed by displaying "Right-handed" in a large size on the image display device. It should be noted that the small right-handed display displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 40-7(a-2) may be displayed continuously during the jackpot game state.

Specifically, in the right-handed effect, as shown in FIGS. 40-7 (a-3) to 40-10 (a-19), the image display device 5 superimposes the fanfare image on the "right-handed" effect. Display continues. Therefore, the lighting order of the effect lamps 9 will be described below. When the right hitting effect is started, as shown in FIG. 40-7 (c-3), the general winning opening vicinity lamp 9g provided at the lower left of the game area is first lit, followed by FIG. 40-7 ( As shown in c-4), the lower left lamp 9bL1, which is the lower left frame lamp 9, lights up. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 40-7 (c-5), of the display device lower lamps 9f provided below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, the left display device lower lamp 9fL lights up, and then As shown in FIG. 40-7 (c-6), the upper left lamp 9bL2, which is the frame lamp 9 in the upper left portion, lights up, and as shown in FIG. 40-8 (c-7), the speaker lamp corresponding to the speaker 8L portion. 9eL lights up. In this way, the performance effect lamps 9 are lit in order from the lower left side of the pachinko game machine 1 toward the upper left side. As shown in FIG. 40-8(b-7), since the big winning hole is in a closed state, the launched game medium does not enter the big winning hole at this stage. The example shown in FIG. 40-8 (b-7) shows an example in which the launched game ball passes through the second path in the upper part of the big winning opening door and is guided to the discharge path.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-8 (c-8), the movable body lamp 9d corresponding to the movable body 32 provided in the central upper part of the game board 2 lights up, and FIG. 40-8 (c-9 ), when the main lamp 9 above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3 lights up, the effect lamp 9 provided in the upper central portion of the pachinko gaming machine 1 lights up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-8 (c-10), the speaker lamp 9eR corresponding to the speaker 8R portion lights up, and then, as shown in FIG. 9 lights up, and as shown in FIG. 40-8 (c-12), the right display device of the display device lower lamps 9f provided below the image display device 5 on the game board 2 The lower lamp 9fR lights up. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 40-9 (c-13), the lower right lamp 9bR1 which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower right part lights up, and the attacker lamp 9c provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 lights up. do. In this way, the performance effect lamps 9 are lit in order from the upper right side of the pachinko game machine 1 toward the lower right side. As a result, the performance effect lamp 9 is lit in order from the lower left side to the upper left side, the center part, and then the upper right side to the lower right side of the pachinko game machine 1, so that the player hits right on the performance effect lamp 9. A right-handed production that suggests will be performed. In this example, both the effect lamp 9 provided on the game machine frame 3 and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are used to suggest a right-hand shot. may be In addition, only the effect lamp 9 provided on the game machine frame 3 is lit from the lower left side to the center and to the lower right direction, and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 alone is lit from the lower left side to the center and right. Both of them may be lit simultaneously or with a time lag, such as lighting downward.

After the right hitting effect on the effect lamp 9 is completed, all the effect lamps 9 are extinguished as shown in FIG. 40-9 (c-15). Note that, as shown in FIG. 40-9 (a-15), the display of hitting to the right on the image display device 5 continues (the effect of hitting to the right is being executed).

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-6, when it is time to open the big winning hole, the 1st R is started, and the big winning hole is opened as shown in FIG. 40-10 (b-16). At this stage, as shown in FIG. 40-10 (a-16), the right-handed display on the image display device 5 is continuously performed, and until a predetermined period elapses, the display is shown in FIG. 40-10 (c-16). 40-10 (a-19) and (c-19), all the effect lamps 9 remain extinguished. Even if all the effect lamps 9 are not turned off, any one of the indices such as luminous intensity, brightness, and illuminance may be set lower than usual. In addition, as shown in FIG. 40-10 (b-16), even after the big winning opening is opened, until a predetermined period of time elapses, FIGS. As shown in (c-13), the production effect lamps 9 may be turned on sequentially to suggest a right-hand shot. In this case, the lighting speed of each effect lamp may be made faster than before the opening of the big prize opening (the lighting period may be shortened and the transition speed may be made faster). Further, when the effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit after the big winning hole is opened to suggest hitting to the right, after the attacker lamp 9c that is lit last is lit, the state is shown in FIG. 40-9 (c-15). It is also possible to keep the lighting state as it is without turning off the light. According to this, it is possible to make the player aware that the big winning opening is in the open state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 40-10 (b-17), when the big winning opening is completely opened, a count of 0.6 seconds is started as a predetermined period corresponding to the first R, and FIG. As shown in (b-18), when the game ball enters the big winning hole, the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, and a winning designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side. Before the 1st R is started (before the big winning hole is opened), the game ball launched by performing the right-handed effect (game ball hit early) also has the big winning hole open. If it exists in the upper part of the big winning opening at the timing, it is possible to win within a predetermined period corresponding to the 1st round. On the side of the effect control board 12, the winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 40-10 (b-18) by the processing of step 042AKS058 in FIG. 2, the attacker lamp 9c lights up in a manner to notify that a prize has been won. In addition, as described above, the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c is performed in a manner that is more than the number of times of light emission per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c, which emits light during the jackpot middle effect, for example. In the example shown in FIG. 40-10 (b-18), the launched game ball passes through the first path, which is the path in the direction of the big winning opening, and is guided to the winning path provided with the count switch 23. example. In addition, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the game ball present at the big winning opening door portion is detected by the count switch 23 is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball existing above the big winning hole is detected by the count switch 23 within a predetermined period after the opening of the big winning hole, and the decrease in the interest in the game can be prevented without making the player feel uneasy. can be prevented.

After the game ball enters the big winning hole as shown in Figure 40-10 (b-18), or time passes without winning from the state shown in Figure 40-10 (b-17), Figure 40- 10 (a-19), (b-19) and (c-19) after a predetermined period of time, as shown in FIG. Since the execution timing has come and the execution timing for displaying the number of acquisitions has come, the processing of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 40-5 is executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40-10 (b-18), when the game ball enters the big winning opening before the predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIG. 40-11 (a-20), the second The number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and a count-up display is also performed. In addition, at the same timing as these displays, as an effect during the big hit (effect during the 1st R), as shown in FIG. , and characters are displayed. In addition, the decorative patterns that make up the big hit displayed as the production during the jackpot (production during the 1st R) and the display of “during BOUNUS” are not shown (the same applies to FIGS. 40-20 described later). It is displayed in a manner suggesting that the player should hit right as shown at 40-21. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40-21 (A-1), a fanfare or right-handed effect is performed, and after a predetermined period of time has passed since the big winning opening is opened, a big win middle effect is shown in FIG. 40-21. As shown in (A-2), a symbol "7", which is a decorative symbol that constitutes a big win, is displayed facing the front, and is displayed above "B" in the display of "BOUNUS". A star image is displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 40-21 (A-3), the symbol "7", which is the decorative symbol that constitutes the big win, is tilted toward the back right. A star-shaped image shifts to the top of "O". Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 40-21 (A-4), the symbol "7", which is a decorative symbol that constitutes a big win, faces the front, and a star is placed above "N" in the display of "BOUNUS". The shape image shifts. After that, as shown in FIG. 40-21 (A-5), the "7" pattern, which is the decorative pattern that constitutes the big win, is tilted toward the back left, and "U" in the display of "BOUNUS" is displayed. , a star-shaped image shifts to the top of . Then, as shown in FIG. 40-21 (A-6), the symbol "7", which is a decorative symbol that constitutes a big win, faces the front, and a star is placed above "S" in the display of "BOUNUS". The shape image transitions back to FIG. 40-21 (A-2). In this way, during the big win effect, the decoration patterns that constitute the big win are moved in the right back direction, the front direction, and the left back direction, and a star-shaped image is displayed rightward from the characters on the left of the display of "BOUNUS in progress". This suggests to the player that he should hit to the right by shifting the . The action display of decorative patterns and the transitional display of star-shaped images that constitute a big win are called effect displays. It includes indications such as turning to the right. That is, the effect display may be displayed in a manner suggesting right-handed hitting. According to this, the effect display suggests that the player should hit the ball to the right, making it easier to recognize the hitting to the right.

Incidentally, during the big-hit production, as shown in FIG. 40-11 (c-20), the production effect lamp 9 is lit according to a light emission pattern preset according to the big-hit production. In this example, a light emission pattern is set in which the effect lamps 9 provided on the game machine frame 3 and the effect lamps 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately lit. Then, as shown in FIG. 40-11 (a-21), "0015" is displayed as the acquired number display. In this way, the effect lamp 9 does not emit light as shown in FIGS. As shown in -11 (c-20) and (c-22), the production effect lamp 9 is lit after the display of the number of acquisitions after a predetermined period of time has elapsed is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to suppress the rapid shooting and promote the firing timing.

On the other hand, when the predetermined period has passed without the game ball entering the big winning slot, as shown in FIG. is displayed. In addition, the point that the number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and the decoration pattern that constitutes the big hit is displayed as a production during the big hit (production during the 1st R), the display of "During BOUNUS", and The point that the character is displayed and the point that the effect lamp 9 is lit according to the predetermined light emission pattern according to the effect during the big win are common regardless of whether the prize is won or not.

Next, as time passes, as shown in FIG. 40-12 (b-23), when the 10th game ball wins the big winning opening in the 1st R, the upper limit that can open the big winning opening period. In addition, along with the winning, the process of step 042AKS064 shown in FIG. 40-5 is executed, the count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 40-12 (a-23), and FIG. 40-12 (a-24). As shown in , the acquisition number display of "0150" is performed. In addition, along with the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in FIG. ), the attacker lamp 9c lights up in a manner notifying that a prize has been won. Incidentally, the upper limit period for which the big winning opening can be opened is a sufficient period even if it is counted from the elapse of the predetermined period for the winning of 10 game balls. Specifically, the upper limit period is 29.5 seconds after opening, and is 28.9 seconds even after the predetermined period has elapsed. Since the interval between consecutive shots is 0.6 seconds, it is a period in which 10 prizes can be won. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of security because a sufficient amount of time is guaranteed for winning a prize.

When the 10th game ball wins the big prize hole in the 1st R, the maximum period in which the big prize hole can be opened is reached, so as shown in FIG. controlled to be closed. After that, until the second R shown in FIG. 40-6 is started, the big winning opening is controlled to be completely closed as shown in FIG. 40-12 (b-25). On the other hand, until the predetermined period of the 2nd R elapses (until the predetermined period of time elapses after n=2), the number of rounds corresponding to the 1st R is displayed as shown in FIG. 40-12 (c-25), the effect during the big win continues (the display of the number of wins is updated according to the winning), and the effect lamp 9 corresponds to the effect during the big win as shown in FIG. 40-12 (c-25). to light up.

In the 1st round, when the 10th game ball enters the big winning hole and the upper limit period is reached, the big winning hole is controlled to be closed. There is a case where a so-called over-winning in which the ball enters the big winning opening following the 10th game ball may occur. Even in the case of over-winning, the count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. In this case, after the count-up display and win number display corresponding to the tenth win, the count-up display and win number display corresponding to the over win are performed continuously, but FIG. 40-12 (b-25). As shown in , the count-up display and winning number display corresponding to the over-winning are completed within a period from when the big winning port is completely closed until it becomes an open state corresponding to the 2nd R. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that an over-win has occurred in the 1st round, and the game interest can be improved. In addition, since the update of the display of the number of acquisitions in the opening corresponding to the first round does not overlap with the display of the number of acquisitions in the opening corresponding to the second round, it is possible to determine whether the winning corresponds to the opening of the round. easier. Also, the winning sound corresponding to the over winning may be a sound different from the normal winning sound (over winning sound). In this case, when the count value exceeds the upper limit of "10", the over-winning sound may be output. Also, the attacker lamp 9c may emit light in a mode corresponding to an over-win, which is different from light emission in a normal winning mode.

Then, corresponding to the second round, as shown in FIG. 40-6, the timing comes when the big winning opening is opened again, and as shown in FIG. 40-13 (b-26), the big winning opening is opened again. controlled to be At this time, it is judged as Yes in step 042AKS065 of FIG. Become. At this stage, since the processing of step 042AKS055 in FIG. 40-5 is executed, as shown in FIG. A display is made (see also FIG. 40-6).

Next, as shown in FIG. 40-13 (b-27), when the big winning hole is completely opened and the game ball enters the big winning hole, unlike the first R, the step of FIG. 40-5 In the processing of 042AKS060, a count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 40-13 (a-27), and the acquisition number display of "0165" is performed as shown in FIG. 40-13 (a-28). In addition, along with the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in FIG. ), the attacker lamp 9c lights up. In this way, in rounds other than the 1st round, even if the prize is won during a predetermined period, the winning number is updated and displayed during the predetermined period. Then, when the 2R predetermined period elapses, the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 40-5 is executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. ' is displayed, and a big win middle effect corresponding to the 2nd R is executed. In this case, the number "1" in the round number display of "1R", which is the first round, is changed to "2". That is, "R" is continuously displayed from the first round. Further, the display of "1R" is continuously displayed until the second R predetermined period elapses. In addition, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, an example is shown in which a common jackpot production is executed regardless of the number of rounds (the same applies to lighting control of the production effect lamp 9), but it is executed in each round. The performance during the jackpot to be played may be varied. The lighting of the production effect lamp 9 is the same. In this way, since the big winning hole is opened before the number of rounds indicating that it is the second round is displayed, the game balls of the player who has been continuously shot from the first round can be released at an early stage. You can win a prize in the big prize mouth. Therefore, in each round of a plurality of round games, it is possible to increase the possibility that the continuously shot game balls will win the big winning opening opened earlier than the round display.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 40-13 (a-26), (b-26), and (c-26), the opening of the big winning opening is controlled corresponding to the second R, and FIG. 40-13 (a-29) ), (b-29), and (c-29), when a predetermined period of time elapses without the game ball winning after the big winning hole is completely opened, FIG. 40-14 (a-31) ), (b-31), and (c-31), the number of wins acquired in the 1st R is displayed continuously. After that, similar processing is performed up to the predetermined final round, and when it is determined that the winning end designation command is received in step 042AKS051 of FIG. Set to terminate. In this way, from the second round onward, if no prize is won within a predetermined period, the number of wins displayed in the previous round will continue to be displayed, while if a prize is won during the predetermined period , the number of obtained balls is added to the display of the number of obtained balls displayed in the previous round and displayed. Therefore, even after the second round, it is possible to easily recognize the winning of the big winning slot.

In addition, for example, in the final round, when the 10th game ball wins the big winning hole and reaches the upper limit period, the big winning hole is controlled to be closed, but at this time, the 11th game ball As shown in FIG. 40-15, the big win game state may end while the ball is caught in the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a). . In this case, at the start of the 1st round (when the big winning slot corresponding to the 1st round is opened) in the case of the next big hit, the game ball will enter the big winning slot, and during the predetermined period of the 1st round Winning of game balls occurs. Also in this case, as shown in FIG. As shown in (a-21), "0015" may be displayed as the display of the acquired number after performing the count-up display. In addition, in such a case, there is a possibility that the launched game ball will win a prize during the predetermined period (possibility that the second ball will win a prize). As shown in a-20) and (a-21), after the count-up display is performed, "0030" may be directly displayed as the acquired number display without displaying "0000" or "0015". According to this, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve the game interest.

As described above, according to the pachinko game machine 1 of the characteristic part 042AK in this embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the winning number in the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 40-5 after a predetermined period of time after the first round is started with the big winning opening opened. Then, if the game ball does not enter the big winning slot within a predetermined period after the start of the first round, a predetermined display indicating that the winning number has not increased is performed after the predetermined period. When a game ball wins a prize in a big winning hole within a predetermined period after the start of one round, the obtained number is displayed as a specific display different from the predetermined display after the predetermined period. According to this, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when the game ball wins the big winning hole within a predetermined period after the start of the first round, directly specifies without displaying the winning number of "0000" as a predetermined display. Display the acquisition number display of "0015" as a display. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and to prevent the decline in the interest in the game.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs count-up display as a notification display that the number of winnings increases when the game ball enters the big winning hole within a predetermined period after the start of the first round. , display the acquired number display of "0015" as a specific display. According to this, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a prize and the number of wins increases.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 counts the timer value for a predetermined period from the timing of receiving the command for specifying during the opening of the large winning opening transmitted from the main board 11 in response to the opening of the large winning opening. is started, and the acquired number is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. According to this, the predetermined period is preferably counted, and when the prize is won within the predetermined period, the specific display is performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the decrease in the interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1, by closing the large winning opening door, guides the launched game ball to the discharge route through the second route of the upper part of the large winning opening door, By opening the winning opening door, the shot game ball is guided to the big winning opening through the first path and detected by the count switch 23. - 特許庁The special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the game ball present at the big winning opening door portion is detected by the count switch 23 is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period. . According to this, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball existing above the big winning hole is detected by the count switch 23 within a predetermined period after the opening of the big winning hole, and the game is interesting without giving the player a sense of unease. can be prevented from decreasing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 40-6, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. The effect is displayed to the player to indicate that he/she should hit to the right. According to this, since the game area to be shot during the big hit is suggested, the game method can be easily recognized and the game interest can be improved.

The open state of the big winning gate means that the big winning gate is in a completely open state, that is, the state where the big winning gate has moved to a position where it is in a completely open state. In response to detecting that the game has moved to a completely open position, the main board 11 side transmits a designation command while the big winning opening is open. According to this, since the predetermined period is counted after the big winning opening is completely opened, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy.

In addition, the game ball (fast-hit game ball) launched by performing the right-handed effect before the 1st R starts (before the big winning hole is opened) also has the big winning hole open. If it exists above the big winning opening at the timing, it is possible to win within the predetermined period corresponding to the 1st R, and the effect control CPU 120, when winning within the predetermined period, after the predetermined period, the specific Acquisition number display as display is performed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the game balls hit quickly from being wasted.

Also, for example, in the final round, when the 10th game ball wins the big winning hole and the upper limit period is reached, the big winning hole is controlled to be closed, but at this time, the 11th game ball As shown in FIG. 40-15, the big win game state may end while the ball is caught in the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a). . In this case, at the start of the 1st round (when the big winning slot corresponding to the 1st round is opened) in the case of the next big hit, the game ball will enter the big winning slot, and during the predetermined period of the 1st round A game ball wins, and the effect control CPU 120 displays the winning number as a specific display after the predetermined period of time has elapsed. According to this, it is possible to prevent dissatisfaction felt by the player when an irregular event occurs.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a fanfare effect suggesting that a big win game state has been reached while the big winning hole is in a closed state and then in an open state. Then, after the big winning opening is opened and a predetermined period has passed, the winning number display and the round number display can be performed, and an effect during the big win corresponding to the round game can be executed. According to this, it is possible to sharpen the presentation and improve the amusement of the game.

Further, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. The attacker lamp 9c is turned on as shown in FIG. 40-10 (c-18). Also, as shown in FIG. 40-12 (b-23), even if the game ball wins in the big winning hole other than the predetermined period, the attacker lamp is displayed as shown in FIG. 40-12 (c-23). Light 9c. According to this, since the specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy, and the fact that the prize has been won within the predetermined period can be visually recognized. easier.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 controls the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the processing of step 042AKS058 in FIG. Light is emitted in a mode (a mode for notifying that a prize has been won) that is more than the number of times of light emission per time. According to this, it becomes easy to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning hole, and the game interest can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 40-10 (b-18), the effect control CPU 120, when the game ball wins the big winning hole during a predetermined period after the big winning hole is opened, A winning sound corresponding to winning is output. Also, as shown in FIG. 40-12 (b-23), even when a game ball wins in the big winning hole outside the predetermined period, a winning sound corresponding to the winning is output. According to this, it becomes easy to recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning hole, and the game interest can be improved.

Also, for the rounds after the first round, the effect control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the round in the processing of step 042AKS061 in FIG. conduct. According to this, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy, and in each round of a plurality of round games, It is possible to increase the possibility of winning the game balls continuously shot to the big winning hole opened earlier than the round display.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, when the round game after the second round is performed, if the game medium does not win the big winning opening within a predetermined period after the opening state of the big winning opening, as shown in FIG. As shown in 40-14 (a-31), when the display of the winning number displayed in the previous round game is continued to be displayed, and at the same time, the game medium wins the big winning slot within the predetermined period. As shown in FIG. 40-14 (a-30), the number of winning balls awarded corresponding to the win is added to the display of the winning number displayed in the previous round game and displayed. According to this, even after the second round, it is possible to easily recognize the winning of the big winning opening.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 performs count-up display as shown in FIG. In this case, after the count-up display and win number display corresponding to the tenth win, the count-up display and win number display corresponding to the over win are performed continuously, but FIG. 40-12 (b-25). As shown in , the count-up display and winning number display corresponding to the over-winning are completed within a period from when the big winning port is completely closed until it becomes an open state corresponding to the 2nd R. According to this, the update of the winning number display at the time of one opening does not overlap with the update of the winning number display at the time of the next opening, so that it is easy to determine which opening corresponds to the win.

In addition, during a predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened, the effect control CPU 120, in a situation where the winning number display is not performed, as shown in FIG. 40-10 (c-18), Although the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the ball enters the big winning hole, in a situation where the number of wins after the predetermined period is displayed, for example, FIG. 40-11 (c-20) or ( As shown in c-21), the production effect lamp 9 provided in the multiple game machine frame 3 and the production effect lamp 9 provided in the game board 2 are alternately turned on, and more than during the predetermined period. The production effect lamp 9 emits light. According to this, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy, and the number of wins after the predetermined period is displayed. It is possible to liven up the subsequent production and improve the amusement of the game.

40-6, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a right-handed effect and a fanfare effect before the start of the first round. 40-7 (c-3) to FIG. 40-9 (c-13), the production effect lamp 9 may be sequentially turned on to suggest right-handed hitting, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, Regarding, for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-11 (c-20) and (c-21), the production effect lamp 9 provided in the multi-game machine frame 3 and the production effect provided in the game board 2 The lamps 9 are lit alternately. According to this, the production effect lamp 9 can be used to suggest a right-hand shot. Further, when the effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit after the big winning hole is opened to suggest hitting to the right, after the attacker lamp 9c that is lit last is lit, the state is shown in FIG. 40-9 (c-15). It is also possible to keep the lighting state as it is without extinguishing the light, thereby making the player aware that the big winning hole is in the open state.

Also, the upper limit period during which the big winning opening can be opened is a period sufficient for ten game balls to win even if counted after the predetermined period has passed. According to this, it is possible to give the player a sense of security because a sufficient amount of time is guaranteed for winning a prize.

40-9 (c-16) to (c-19), the effect control CPU 120 waits until the big winning hole is opened and a predetermined period elapses, that is, until the winning number is displayed. 40-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the production effect lamp 9 is not illuminated, and the production effect lamp 9 is illuminated after the display of the number of acquisitions after a predetermined period of time has elapsed is displayed. Let According to this, it is possible to encourage the player to suppress the rapid shooting and promote the launch timing.

40-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the production control CPU 120 emits the production effect lamp 9 at the same timing as the execution timing of the production during the big hit after the elapse of the predetermined period. Let According to this, the performance can be livened up at once at the timing when the performance during the big win is executed, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 40-21, the effect control CPU 120, at the timing when the number of wins is displayed, displays the effect display of transitional display of decorative symbols and star-shaped images that constitute the big win, suggesting hitting to the right. mode. According to this, the effect display suggests that the ball should be hit to the right, and the player can easily recognize that the ball should be hit to the right.

(Modified example of characteristic part 042AK)
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 40-9(a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), the production effect lamps 9 turn on in order to suggest that the player should hit to the right. Although the example in which all the effect lamps 9 are extinguished after the right-handed effect by the effect lamps 9 is completed has been shown, this is just an example. For example, after the states shown in FIGS. 40-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), FIGS. 40-16 (a-16A), (b-16A), and (c-16A) 40-16 (c-16A), the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 at the timing (FIG. 40-16 (b-16A)) where the big winning hole is opened. An attacker lamp 9c provided at the position may be lit. According to this, it is possible for the player to easily visually recognize that the big winning opening is in the open state. The attacker lamp 9c may be lit continuously until a predetermined period elapses or during the open period.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the round display is updated from the first round to the second round, the number "1" in the round number display of "1R", which is the first round, is changed to "2". , "R" is continuously displayed from the first round, and the display of "1R" is continuously displayed until the predetermined period of the second R elapses, but this is just an example. be. For example, as shown in FIG. 40-17, at the end of the open state corresponding to the first round, that is, at the timing when the big winning hole is closed, the display of "1" out of the display of "1R" is erased. , "R" may be displayed only. Then, "2" may be displayed at the timing when the second R predetermined period has elapsed, and "2R" indicating the second round may be displayed. It should be noted that the same applies to the second and subsequent rounds. According to this, the end of each round can be visually recognized, and the game can be sharpened.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the maximum number of prizes to be won is 10 (maximum number of prizes to be won is 10), which is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened. , it may be so arranged that if two coins are received during a predetermined period before the number of rounds is displayed, an over-win is awarded. In this case, a sound different from the normal winning sound (over winning sound) may be output as the winning sound for the over winning during the predetermined period, and the attacker lamp 9c may also emit light in a manner indicating the occurrence of the over winning. .

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example of counting the number of game balls entering the big winning hole is shown for the display of the winning number. good too. Since the right-handed ball is hit during the big hit, the general winning hole for winning the prize is the general winning hole 10 provided above the variable winning ball device 6B. FIG. 40-18 is a flow chart showing an example of various display processing in the case of counting winnings to the general winning opening 10 during the big win. Description of the same parts as in FIG. 40-5 will be omitted.

In the various display processes shown in FIG. 40-18, when it is determined that the winning designation command has not been received at step 042AKS056 (step 042AKS056; No), a general winning indicating that the game ball has entered the general winning opening 10 It is determined whether or not the designated command has been received (step 042AKS081). Then, when the general winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning to the general winning slot 10 (step 042AKS081; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of winning balls ( step 042AKS082). After executing the processing of step 042AKS082, or when the general winning designation command is not received, that is, when there is no winning to the general winning opening 10 (step 042AKS081; No), the processing of step 042AKS059 is performed. In addition, along with the winning of the general winning hole 10, a winning sound indicating that the game ball has won the general winning hole 10 (a winning sound different from the case of winning the big winning hole) may be output.

Further, in the various display processes shown in FIG. 40-18, when it is determined that the winning designation command has not been received at step 042AKS062 (step 042AKS062; No), it further indicates that the game ball has entered the general winning hole 10. It is determined whether or not a general winning designation command has been received (step 042AKS083). Then, when the general winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning to the general winning slot 10 (step 042AKS083; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of winning balls ( Step 042AKS083), update display of the acquired number (step 042AKS085). When performing the acquired number update display in step 042 AKS085, the acquired number display is performed after performing the display of counting up (notifying display that the acquired number increases). After executing the processing of step 042AKS085, or when the general winning designation command is not received, that is, when there is no winning to the general winning opening 10 (step 042AKS083; No), the processing of step 042AKS065 is performed. In addition, along with the winning of the general winning hole 10, a winning sound indicating that the game ball has won the general winning hole 10 (a winning sound different from the case of winning the big winning hole) may be output.

Next, an example of an effect operation and the like in the case of counting winnings to the general winning opening 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40-19 and 40-20. FIGS. 40-19 and 40-20 are diagrams showing an example of effect operation display, the opening/closing state of the big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps on the image display device 5. FIG. (a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17) shown in FIG. 40-19 are shown in FIG. 40-10 ( a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17). As shown in the figure, when the big winning opening is opened, a count of 0.6 seconds is started as a predetermined period. When the game ball enters the general winning hole 10, the state shifts to that shown in FIGS. 40-19 (a-18A), (b-18A), and (c-18A). 40-19 (b-18A), after the game ball has entered the general winning opening 10, or from the state shown in FIG. Time passes without winning the winning opening 10, and when a predetermined period of time elapses as shown in FIGS. When a prize is won in mouth 10, the state shifts to the states shown in FIGS. , the number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is the first round is displayed, and a count-up display is performed. In addition, at the same timing as these displays, as a production during the big hit (production during the 1st R), as shown in FIG. , and characters are displayed. In the big-hit production, as shown in FIG. 40-20 (c-20A), the production effect lamp 9 is lit according to a light emission pattern preset according to the big-hit production. Then, as shown in FIG. 40-20 (a-21A), "0003" is displayed as the acquired number display.

On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time has passed without the game ball winning the general winning slot 10, as shown in FIG. ” is displayed. In addition, the point that the number of rounds of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and the decoration pattern that constitutes the big hit is displayed as a production during the big hit (production during the 1st R), the display of "During BOUNUS", and The point that the character is displayed and the point that the effect lamp 9 is lit according to the predetermined light emission pattern according to the effect during the big win are common regardless of whether the prize is won or not.

Thus, even if the game ball wins the general winning opening 10 during the predetermined period after the large winning opening is opened at the start of the first round, the predetermined After the period has passed, "0003" is displayed as the winning number display in response to the winning in the general winning slot 10. FIG. Further, when no game ball wins in the general winning hole 10 during the predetermined period, "0000" is displayed as a predetermined display indicating that no prize ball has been awarded. Therefore, the winning number corresponding to the winning is also displayed for the game balls that have won the general winning hole 10 during the predetermined period, so that the player can be prevented from feeling uneasy.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 042AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 042AK is a gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player, and display means (for example, the image display device 5). Directing effect control CPU 120 etc.) and variable winning means (for example, special variable winning ball device 7 etc.) that can be changed between a first state in which game media are easy to win and a second state in which game media are impossible or difficult to win. and control means capable of executing a round game a plurality of times in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then to the second state while being controlled to the advantageous state. (for example, a CPU 103 that performs a round game, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying a given amount display relating to the given amount of game value given to the variable prize winning means by winning a game medium ( For example, displaying the number of wins, etc.), when the first round game out of a plurality of round games is performed, a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state After the lapse of time, the awarded amount is displayed (for example, in the first round, the winning number is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened), and within the predetermined period of time, the game medium is displayed by the variable winning means. If no prize is won, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value has not been awarded is displayed as the display of the amount to be awarded after the predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, "0000" is displayed as the display of the number of winnings), and When the game medium wins in the variable prize winning means within a predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the given amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display). etc.).

According to such a configuration, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of unease.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the display means displays the specific display without displaying the predetermined display when the game medium wins the variable prize winning means within the predetermined period. (For example, "0015" may be displayed instead of "0000").

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused and to prevent the decline in the interest in the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, the display means provides the game value when a game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period. After performing a count-up display indicating the above, a display corresponding to the game value given as the specific display is performed (for example, after performing a count-up display as a notification display that the number of acquisitions increases, "0015" , etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that there is a prize and the number of wins will increase.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, the display means displays a command indicating that the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state. After the predetermined period of time has passed after the reception, the display of the amount to be awarded is started (for example, counting of the timer value for the predetermined period is started from the timing of receiving the command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening transmitted from the main board 11 side. etc.).

According to such a configuration, since the predetermined period is preferably counted and a specific display is performed when a prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above, the variable prize winning means is in the first state to lead the game medium to a prize winning path through a first path (for example, a large prize winning path). By opening the winning opening door, the fired game ball is led to the first path and leading to the big winning opening, etc.), and the second state is established to lead the game medium to the discharge path. Path forming means including 2 paths (for example, by closing the big winning gate door, the launched game ball is guided to the ejection path by passing through the second path in the upper part of the big winning gate door) and detection means (e.g., count switch 23, etc.) formed in the winning path for detecting the winning of the game medium, wherein the time from the path forming means to the detection means for the game medium is within the predetermined period. (For example, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the game ball existing in the large winning opening door is detected by the count switch 23 is a predetermined period of 0.6 seconds or less. etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball existing above the big winning hole is detected within a predetermined period of time after the opening of the big winning hole, so that the game can be enjoyed without making the player feel uneasy. A decrease can be prevented.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above, after being controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means is in the first state, Performing an operation prompting display to promote the operation (for example, during the period from the big win to the opening of the big winning opening, as shown in FIG. 40-7 (a-3), the game to indicate to the player that they should hit right).

According to such a configuration, since the operation to be performed during the advantageous state is suggested, the game method can be easily recognized, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above, the first state is a state in which a variable winning door included in the variable winning means is completely opened (for example, The open state of the big winning gate means that the big winning gate is in a completely open state, that is, the state where the big winning gate has moved to a position where it is in a completely open state. In response to detecting that the game has moved to a completely open position, the main board 11 side may transmit a designation command during the opening of the big winning opening.

According to such a configuration, since the predetermined period is counted after the big winning opening is completely opened, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without making the player feel uneasy.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above, the operation prompting display is performed before the first round game in the advantageous state is started. When the shot game medium wins the variable winning means, the specific display is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, a game ball shot by performing a right-handed effect before the first round is started). However, it is possible to win a prize at the timing when the big prize opening is opened, and if a prize is won within the predetermined period, the number of wins may be displayed as a specific display after the predetermined period.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the game media shot before the start of the round game from being wasted.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above, in the final round game among the plurality of round games in the advantageous state, the variable winning means When changing from the first state to the second state, the advantageous state ends with the game medium sandwiched (for example, in the final round, the 11th game ball is a special variable winning ball as shown in FIG. 40-15 Device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a), the jackpot game state ends while being sandwiched, etc.), the first round game when controlled again to the advantageous state in the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state, and when the sandwiched game medium wins in the variable winning means, the specific display is displayed after the predetermined period of time has elapsed ( For example, when the next big hit occurs, the game ball enters the big winning slot at the start of the 1st round, and after the lapse of a predetermined period, the winning number is displayed as a specific display.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent dissatisfaction felt by the player when an irregular event occurs.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above, the period until the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state after being controlled to the advantageous state , it is possible to execute a suggestive effect suggesting that the control is in the advantageous state (for example, during the period from the closed state to the open state of the big winning port, a fanfare effect suggesting that a big win game state has been executed) possible, etc.), along with the start of display of the given amount display after the lapse of the predetermined period, it is possible to execute a round game display capable of specifying the round game being executed and an effect during the round corresponding to the round game. (For example, after a predetermined period of time has passed after the big winning opening is opened, the number of wins is displayed together with the number of rounds, and it is possible to execute an effect during the big win corresponding to the round game).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to sharpen the presentation and improve the game interest.

(Explanation of means related to characteristic part 043AK)
Characteristic part 042AK includes the following characteristic part 043AK. (1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 043AK is a gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player, and display means (for example, the image display device 5). Directing effect control CPU 120 etc.) and variable winning means (for example, special variable winning ball device 7 etc.) that can be changed between a first state in which game media are easy to win and a second state in which game media are impossible or difficult to win. When,
Control means (for example, CPU 103 for performing a round game, etc.), and the display means can display a given amount display related to the given amount of game value given by winning the game medium to the variable winning means (for example, a winning number display, etc.), when the first round game among the round games is performed, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state The awarded amount is displayed (for example, in the first round, the number of wins is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened), and the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period of time. If not, after the predetermined period of time has passed, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value has not been awarded is displayed as the display of the amount to be awarded (for example, "0000" is displayed as the display of the acquired number), and the predetermined period of time is reached. If the game medium wins in the variable prize winning means within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the display of the amount to be awarded after the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the display of the number of winnings). , a light emitting means (for example, the production effect lamp 9, etc.), and a light emission control means (for example, a production control CPU 120, etc.) for controlling the light emitting means, the light emission control means, after the elapse of the predetermined period, the game medium When the variable winning means is won, and when the game medium wins the variable winning means before the predetermined period elapses, the light emitting means is controlled with a light emission pattern corresponding to the winning of the game medium ( For example, when a game ball wins in a big winning hole, the attacker lamp 9c is illuminated regardless of whether or not the winning is within a predetermined period.

According to such a configuration, when a prize is won within the predetermined period, the specific display is performed, so that it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game without giving the player a sense of unease, and also to prevent the player from losing interest in the game, even if the prize is won within the predetermined period. becomes easier to see.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the light emitting means may be a specific light emitting means (for example, an attacker lamp 9c) positioned near the variable winning means that emits light when a game medium wins in the variable winning means. etc.), and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means (for example, the performance effect lamp 9 other than the attack lamp 9c). , The number of times of light emission per unit time is larger than the light emission of the predetermined light emission means (for example, the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the processing of step 042AKS058 (the same applies to step 042AKS064), and the game other than the attacker lamp 9c that emits light in the production during the jackpot The number of times of light emission of the effect lamp 9 per unit time is greater than the number of light emission (a form for notifying that the player has won a prize).

According to this configuration, it is easy to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning hole, and the game interest can be improved.

(3) The gaming machine described in (1) or (2) further includes sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.), and the sound output means is activated when a game medium wins in the variable winning means. A winning sound corresponding to winning is output, and when the game medium wins in the variable winning means after the lapse of the predetermined period and when the game medium wins in the variable winning means before the lapse of the predetermined period, the winning A sound may be output (for example, when a game ball wins in the big winning hole, a winning sound may be output regardless of whether the winning is within a predetermined period).

According to this configuration, it is easy to recognize that the game ball has entered the big winning hole, and the game interest can be improved.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 044AK)
Characteristic portion 042AK includes the following characteristic portion 044AK. (1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 044AK is a gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state for the player, and display means (for example, the image display device 5). Directing effect control CPU 120 etc.) and variable winning means (for example, special variable winning ball device 7 etc.) that can be changed between a first state in which game media are easy to win and a second state in which game media are impossible or difficult to win. and control means capable of executing a round game a plurality of times in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then to the second state while being controlled to the advantageous state. (for example, a CPU 103 that performs a round game, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying a given amount display relating to the given amount of game value given to the variable prize winning means by winning a game medium ( For example, the number of acquisitions is displayed), a round game display that can identify the round game being executed can be displayed (for example, the number of rounds is displayed), and the first round of the multiple round games When a game is played, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable winning means has changed from the second state to the first state, the awarded amount display and the round game display corresponding to the first round game are performed. is displayed (for example, in the first round, the number of rounds and the number of wins are displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened), and the second and subsequent rounds of the multiple round games are displayed. When a game is played, the round game display corresponding to the second round game or later is displayed after the predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the second round, the number of rounds is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened.) If the game medium does not win the variable winning means within the predetermined period, After the lapse of time, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value is not given is displayed as the display of the amount to be given (for example, "0000" is displayed as the display of the number of acquisitions), and the game medium is changed within the predetermined period. When the winning means wins, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the given amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display).

According to this configuration, when a prize is won within a predetermined period, the specific display is performed, so that it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest in the game without giving the player a sense of unease. , it is possible to increase the possibility of winning the game balls continuously shot to the big winning opening opened earlier than the round display.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state when the round game is played for the second time or later. If the game medium does not win in the variable winning means within the above period, the award amount display that was displayed in the previous round game is continued to be displayed (for example, when the round game after the second round is performed, If the game medium does not enter the big winning slot within a predetermined period after the big winning slot is opened, as shown in FIG. within a predetermined period after the variable prize-winning means changes from the second state to the first state when the round game is performed for the second time or later. When the game medium wins the variable winning means on the first day, the given amount according to the game value given corresponding to the winning is added from the given amount display displayed in the previous round game. (For example, if the game medium wins the big prize slot within a predetermined period, as shown in FIG. , the number of winning balls awarded corresponding to the winning is added and displayed).

According to this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize the winning of the big winning opening even in the second and subsequent round games.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, the display means can update and display the display of the award amount being displayed in response to winning of game media in the variable winning means. The update display of the awarded amount display is finished until the variable winning means once changes from the first state to the second state and then returns to the first state (for example, the big winning opening is completely closed). The count-up display and winning number display corresponding to the over-winning may be completed within a period from the closing to the opening state corresponding to the 2nd R).

According to this configuration, the update of the winning number display at the time of one opening does not overlap with the update of the winning number display at the time of the next opening, so it becomes easy to determine which opening corresponds to the win. .

(Description of means related to characteristic part 045AK)
Characteristic portion 042AK includes the following characteristic portion 045AK. (1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 045AK is a gaming machine (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player, and display means (for example, the image display device 5). Directing effect control CPU 120 etc.) and variable winning means (for example, special variable winning ball device 7 etc.) that can be changed between a first state in which game media are easy to win and a second state in which game media are impossible or difficult to win. and control means capable of executing a round game a plurality of times in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then to the second state while being controlled to the advantageous state. (for example, a CPU 103 that performs a round game, etc.), and the display means is capable of displaying a given amount display relating to the given amount of game value given to the variable prize winning means by winning a game medium ( For example, displaying the number of wins, etc.), when the first round game out of a plurality of round games is performed, a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state After the lapse of time, the awarded amount is displayed (for example, in the first round, the winning number is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the large winning opening is opened), and within the predetermined period of time, the game medium is displayed by the variable winning means. If no prize is won, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value has not been awarded is displayed as the display of the amount to be awarded after the predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, "0000" is displayed as the display of the number of winnings), and When the game medium wins in the variable winning means within a predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the given amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display). etc.), a plurality of light emitting means (for example, effect lamp 9, etc.), and a light emission control means (for example, effect control CPU 120, etc.) for controlling the light emitting means, wherein the light emission control means is the variable winning means is in the first state and the display of the award amount after the lapse of the predetermined period is displayed, the variable winning means is in the first state and the display of the award amount before the lapse of the predetermined period is better is not displayed (for example, during a predetermined period, that is, in a situation where the number of acquisitions is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 40-10 (c-18) Although the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the game ball enters the big winning slot, the winning number is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed. 40-11 (c-20) and (c-21), for example, the production effect lamp 9 provided in the multi-game machine frame 3 and the game board 2 are provided The effect lamps 9 are alternately lit, and more effect lamps 9 emit light than during a predetermined period, etc.).

According to such a configuration, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of unease, and display the number of winnings after the predetermined period of time. It is possible to liven up the production after the is performed and improve the amusement of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, after being controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means enters the first state, an operation prompting display for prompting the player to perform an operation is displayed. It is possible (for example, to perform a right-handed display), and the light emitting means is a specific light emitting means (for example, an attacker lamp 9c etc.) located near the variable winning means that emits light when a game medium wins in the variable winning means ), and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means (for example, the performance effect lamp 9 other than the attack lamp 9c), and when the variable winning means is in the first state, the When the application amount display is not displayed, the predetermined light emission means is caused to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the operation prompting display while the specific light emission means is caused to emit light, and the application amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period is displayed. When there is, the specific light emitting means and the predetermined light emitting means are caused to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the round game (for example, until a predetermined period elapses after the large winning opening is opened, until the ) to FIG. 40-9 (c-13), the production effect lamp 9 is sequentially lit to suggest right-handed hitting, and after a predetermined period of time has passed, for example, FIGS. 40-11 (c-20) and (c -21), the production effect lamp 9 provided in the frame 3 for the multi-game machine and the production effect lamp 9 provided in the game board 2 are alternately turned on, and the big winning opening is opened. In the case where the production effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit later to suggest a right-hand shot, after lighting the attacker lamp 9c which is lit last, it is left lit without being turned off as shown in FIG. etc.).

According to this configuration, the operation can be promoted by using the predetermined light emitting means, and the player can be made aware that the variable prize winning means is in the first state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above, in the round game, when a specific number of game media wins, one round game ends and the next round game starts. (For example, when 10 game balls win, it becomes an upper limit period in which a large winning opening can be opened.) After the predetermined period has passed, the time until the variable winning means is in the second state is It is sufficient time for the game medium to win the specified number of prizes (for example, regarding the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened, it is sufficient to count after the predetermined period has passed for 10 game balls to win). period, etc.).

According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of security because a sufficient amount of time is guaranteed for winning.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, in the round game, one round game ends when a specific number of game media are won, and the next round game starts (for example, 10 (e.g., the upper limit period for opening the big winning hole by winning a game ball), the time from the elapse of the predetermined period until the variable winning means is in the second state is the game medium It is sufficient time for a specific number of prizes to be won (for example, the upper limit period for opening the large winning opening is sufficient even if counting from the elapse of a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win) etc.), when the variable winning means is in the first state, the light emission of the light emitting means is restricted when the display of the awarded amount before the lapse of the predetermined period is not displayed, and the award after the lapse of the predetermined period After the amount display is displayed, the light emitting means is caused to emit light (for example, until the large winning opening is opened and a predetermined period elapses, that is, until the winning number is displayed). As shown in c-19), the production effect lamp 9 is not illuminated, and as shown in FIGS. (e.g., the effect lamp 9 is caused to emit light).

According to this configuration, it is possible to encourage the player to suppress the rapid shooting and promote the firing timing.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (4) above, the advantageous state is controlled until the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, a fanfare effect can be executed), and the round game being executed can be specified along with the start of display of the given amount display after the predetermined period of time has elapsed. It is possible to execute a round production corresponding to the display and the round game (for example, display the number of rounds, display the number of acquisitions, and perform a jackpot production after a predetermined period of time), and the execution timing of the production during the round is the same. Lighting the light emitting means at the timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 40-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the production effect lamp 9 is lighted at the same timing as the execution timing of the production during the big hit) , may be

According to this configuration, at the timing when the mid-round production is executed, the production can be livened up at once, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

(6) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above, further comprising general winning means (for example, general winning port 10) capable of winning game media, wherein the display means It is possible to display the awarded amount of game value imparted due to the game medium winning the general winning means as the imparted amount display (for example, display of the number of winnings corresponding to the winning of the general winning slot 10). etc.), if the game medium does not win the general winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the game value has not been awarded is displayed as the grant amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed ( For example, if no game ball wins in the general winning hole 10 within a predetermined period, a predetermined display indicating that no prize balls have been awarded, such as "0000", is displayed, etc.). When the general prize winning means is won, after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, a display corresponding to the winning of the general prize means is displayed as the amount display (for example, during a predetermined period after the big prize opening is opened) When the game ball wins in the general winning opening 10, after the predetermined period has elapsed, "0003" is displayed as the winning number display in response to the winning in the general winning opening 10). good too.

According to this configuration, since the display corresponding to the winning of the general winning means is also performed for the winning of the general winning means during the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy.

(7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (6) above, the variable winning means is provided in a predetermined area in the game area (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the right game area). provided, etc.), the display means can display a first image (for example, a decorative pattern that constitutes a big win) at the same timing as the display of the award amount, and the first image is displayed during the advantageous state An effect is displayed at the same timing as the grant amount display (for example, an effect display that activates a decorative pattern that constitutes a big win is performed), and the effect display is displayed in a manner that suggests the predetermined area (for example, effect display , the decorative patterns that constitute the big hit are moved in the right back direction, the front, and the left back direction, and displayed in a manner suggesting a right hit).

According to this configuration, the game area to be shot is suggested by the effect display, and the player can easily recognize the game area to be shot.

(Description of the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine relating to the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 41-1 to 41-4. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the first form of the characteristic part 20SH, the winning number display regarding the number of prize balls given in the big win game state and the notification that the number of prize balls given in the big win game state has reached a predetermined number. Acquisition number notification display and display are possible. The characters used for the display of the number of acquisitions and the display of the number of acquisitions include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. The specific character used to display the number of wins is such that the background image during the big win cannot be visually recognized from the specific area. As for the specific characters used for the display of the number of winnings, the background image during the big win can be visually recognized from the specific area.

Hereinafter, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH having such characteristics will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Background Art Related to First Form of Characteristic Portion 20SH)
FIG. 41-1 is a diagram showing a background art related to the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH.

When the pachinko game machine is controlled to the jackpot game state, it may display the winning number display regarding the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. 41-1(A). In the example shown in FIG. 41-1(A), the display of the acquired number of "points 120" is displayed corresponding to the fact that the number of acquired balls is 120.

For display of the winning number, numbers for displaying the number of winning balls and characters other than the numbers for recognizing the display of the winning number are used. The numerals used to display the number of acquisitions are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, and the like. The winning number display shown in FIG. 41-1(A) has the characters "point" for recognizing that it is the winning number display and the number "120" for displaying the number of prize balls. used.

Among the characters used to display the number of acquisitions, there are characters in which a specific area is formed. Here, the specific area is an area surrounded by the lines forming the character, and is an area not connected to the area outside the lines forming the character. Here, "not leading to the area outside the line forming the character" means that the "specific area" is completely isolated from the "area outside the line forming the character" by the "line forming the character". and the case where the "specific area" is not completely separated from the "area outside the lines forming the characters" by the "lines forming the characters" but appears to be a different area at first glance. ,including. In the following description, a character in which a specific area is formed will be referred to as a "specific character".

For example, in the case of Arabic numerals, "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" correspond to specific characters. That is, in the case of Arabic numerals "0", "6", "8", and "9", the specific area is a substantially circular area surrounded by curves forming the characters. The Arabic numeral "8" is formed with two specific areas. For the Arabic numeral "4", the triangular area surrounded by the three straight lines forming the character is the specific area.

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine is controlled to the jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. 41-1(A), the pachinko gaming machine displays a jackpot middle background image regarding the jackpot game state over the entire display area of the image display device. do. In the example shown in FIG. 41-1(A), a background image of a flying "butterfly" is displayed during a big win. The background image during the big win is an image displayed on the back side of other displays displayed on the image display device in the big win game state. The background video during the jackpot includes many lines representing animation pictures and effects.

The display of the number of acquisitions is displayed in a small size in an end area that does not hinder the visibility of the background image during the big win in the display area of the image display device. If the background image during the big win changes over time, the line of the background image during the big win may overlap behind the display of the number of wins. Then, when a specific character is displayed in the display of the number of acquisitions, the big hit is behind the specific area of the specific character, such as the part of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 41-1(A). If the lines of the middle background image overlap, the line of the middle background image of the big win may be assimilated with the line forming the specific character, and the specific character may appear to be different from the original character.

FIG. 41-1(B) is an enlarged view of the portion of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 41-1(A). In the examples shown in FIGS. 41-1 (A) and (B), the line of the background image "Butterfly" of the background image during the big win is superimposed on the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used to display the number of wins, The line of 'butterfly' in the background image during the big win is assimilated with the line forming the specific character '0', and the specific character '0' looks like the Arabic numeral '8' instead of the Arabic numeral '0'.

In this way, if the characters of the winning number display are misidentified as characters different from the original characters, it is impossible to accurately recognize the number of prize balls provided in the jackpot game state. However, for example, it is difficult to adjust the position of the line included in the background image during the big win so that the line of the background image during the big win does not overlap the specific area of the specific character.

The first form of the characteristic portion 20SH has been made in view of such a background. A first form of the characteristic portion 20SH will be described below.

(Acquisition number display in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 41-2(A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used to display the acquired number in the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH.

In the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH, the specific area 20SHI1 of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to the specific characters among the Arabic numerals used for displaying the acquired number is , are displayed in a non-transparent display mode, which is different from the display mode of the lines 20SHS1 forming the characters. In the example shown in FIG. 41-2(A), the color of the line 20SHS1 of the Arabic numerals used to display the acquired number is "black", whereas the specific characters "0", "4", and "6" are displayed. , “8”, and “9” are displayed in “white”.

Further, the display mode of the specific region 20SHI1 is not limited to a color different from the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the character, and the character is displayed to the extent that the specific region 20SHI1 and the line 20SHS1 forming the character can be accurately distinguished. Any display mode having a high contrast with respect to the display mode of the line 20SHS1 to be formed may be used.

For example, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color with a high contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. In that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may be brightness with a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the lines 20SHS1 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture with a low contrast with respect to the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture having a low contrast with respect to the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character.

Further, for example, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may be brightness with a high contrast with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color having a low contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture with a low contrast with respect to the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture having a low contrast with respect to the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character.

Also, for example, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be texture that has a high contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color having a low contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may be brightness with a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the lines 20SHS1 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture having a low contrast with respect to the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character.

Further, for example, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture having a high contrast with respect to the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the character. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a color having a low contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters. Further, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI1 may be brightness with a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the lines 20SHS1 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI1 may be a texture with a low contrast with respect to the texture of the line 20SHS1 forming the characters.

Of the characters used to display the number of wins, numbers other than Arabic numerals for displaying the number of winning balls, and specific characters among characters other than numbers for making it recognizable as the number of wins are also shown in Figure 41- Like the Arabic numerals shown in 2(A), the specific area is displayed in a non-transparent display mode that is different from the display mode of the lines forming the characters.

(Acquisition number notification display in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 41-2(A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH.

The pachinko game machine 1 displays a winning number notification display for notifying that the number of awarded balls reaches a predetermined number in a big win game state. - 特許庁

Here, the time saving control and the variable probability control that are executed after the end of the big hit gaming state are that the special game is executed a predetermined number of times, or before the special game is executed a predetermined number of times. However, for example, the number of times of time saving control and variable probability control may be different for each jackpot type, and in the case of a specific jackpot type, the high that is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state The definite control and the time saving control may be continuously executed until a big win occurs again after the big win game state is ended. In such a case, the jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state, which is a so-called continuous game state.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the consecutive game state, when the number of prize balls provided in the jackpot game state of plural times in the consecutive game state reaches a predetermined number, the obtained number notification display for notifying that fact is displayed. do.

When the number of winning balls given in the jackpot game state reaches the winning number notification display, a number for displaying the predetermined number and a character other than the number for recognizing that the winning number notification display is displayed. and are used. The numerals used for the acquisition number notification display are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, and the like.

Among the characters used for the acquisition number notification display, there are characters corresponding to the specific characters. In the first form of the characterizing portion 20SH, as shown in FIG. 41-2(B), the specific area of the specific characters used for display of the number of acquisitions is displayed in a transparent display mode. In the example shown in FIG. 41-2(B), among the Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display, the specific characters "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" are specified. The area 20SHI2 is displayed in a transparent display mode.

Among the characters used for the winning number notification display, when the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state reaches a predetermined number, numbers other than Arabic numerals for displaying the predetermined number, or the winning number notification display. Specific characters among characters other than numerals for recognition are also displayed in a transparent display mode in specific areas, such as Arabic numerals shown in FIG. 41-2(B).

(Appearance of acquisition number display in the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH)
FIG. 41-3(A) is a diagram showing how the obtained number display looks in the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH. FIG. 41-3(B) is an enlarged view of the portion of the Arabic numeral “0” surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 41-1(A).

In the examples shown in FIGS. 41-3(A) and (B), the line of the background image of the background image during the big win is superimposed on the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used for the winning number display 20SHK. However, since the specific area 20SHI1 is displayed in "white", the background image during the big win cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI1. Therefore, in the specific area 20SHI1, the "butterfly" line 20SHHS of the background image during the big win is not assimilated with the line 20SHS1 forming the specific character "0", and the specific character "0" is accurately represented as the Arabic numeral "0". can recognize.

On the image display device 5, in addition to the winning number display 20SHK, a big win display 20SHO for recognizing that it is controlled to the big win game state, and a big win combination derived and displayed when it is controlled to the big win game state. A decoration symbol display 20SHZ indicating a fixed decoration symbol, a round number display 20SHR indicating the round number of the round game in the jackpot game state, and a right-handed display 20SHM suggesting that the player should hit to the right are displayed. It is The jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM are also placed in the end regions that do not hinder the visibility of the background image during the big win in the display area of the image display device 5, similarly to the winning number display 20SHK. displayed small.

The characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative pattern display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right-handed display 20SHM are the same type of characters as the winning number display 20SHK and winning number notification display, and the winning number display 20SHK and winning. A character different from the character used for number notification display may be included. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41-4, "numerals" and "katakana" are used for the characters of the acquired number display 20SHK and the acquired number notification display 20SHKH. On the other hand, the jackpot display 20SHO uses "alphabet" and "kanji" which are different types of characters from the characters used for the number-of-wins display 20SHK and the number-of-wins notification display. Also, the decoration symbol display 20SHZ uses "numbers" which are the same type of characters as the characters used for the winning number display 20SHK and the winning number notification display. In the round number display 20SHR, the characters used for the winning number display 20SHK and the winning number notification display are the same type of characters as "numbers", and the characters used for the winning number display 20SHK and the winning number notification display are different. "Alphabet", which is a type of character, is used. The right-handed display 20SHM uses "kanji", "hiragana", and "symbols", which are different types of characters from the characters used for the winning number display 20SHK and the winning number notification display.

Among the characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative symbol display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right-handed display 20SHM, there are characters corresponding to specific characters regardless of the type of the characters. The specific areas of the specific characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM are also in a non-transparent display mode, similar to the specific area 20SHI1 for the winning number display 20SHK. Since it is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode of the line 20SHS1 to be formed, the background image during the big win cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI1.

(Example of production operation of acquisition number display and acquisition number notification display in the first form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 41-4 is a diagram showing an effect operation example of acquisition number display and acquisition number notification display.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41-4(A), the display area of the image display device 5 is a first display area 20SH51 and an area surrounding the first display area 20SH51. Various displays are performed by distinguishing the second display area 20SH52 narrower than 20SH51. In the example shown in FIG. 41-4(A), the area inside the two-dot chain line is the first display area 20SH51, and the area outside the two-dot chain line is the second display area 20SH52.

As shown in FIG. 41-4(A), the effect control CPU 120 displays the background image during the big win in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5. FIG. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 displays the acquisition number display 20SHK on the front side of the background image during the big win in the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5 . In addition, as shown in FIG. 41-4(A), the second display area 20SH52 also displays a big win display, a decoration symbol display, a round number display, and a right-handed display.

Here, as described above, in this embodiment, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls when the game balls enter the big winning hole. In FIG. 41-4(A), since the acquisition number display 20SHK with "point 990" is displayed, it can be recognized that 990 game balls have been paid out as prize balls in the jackpot game state. can. The effect control CPU 120 updates the number of the winning number display 20SHK each time a game ball is paid out in the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, it is assumed that game balls enter the big winning hole and 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls.

In response to the fact that 15 game balls have been paid out, the effect control CPU 120 changes the number of the acquired number display 20SHK from "990" as shown in FIGS. It counts up by one until "1005". In that case, the number of 20 SHK obtained is passed through the so-called "Kiriban", which is a rounded number of "1000". In other words, the number of prize balls provided in the jackpot game state has reached "1000".

Here, the effect control CPU 120 displays the acquired number notification display every time "1000" game balls are paid out in the jackpot game state. For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the acquired number notification display of "over 1000" when the number of prize balls in the big win game state reaches "1000", and the number of prize balls in the big win game state is "2000". , the number-of-acquisitions notification display of ``Over 2000'' is displayed.

When the number of acquisition number display 20SHK becomes Kiriban's "1000", the effect control CPU 120 notifies the acquisition number at the right end of the display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 41-4(D). A part of display 20SHKH is displayed. Then, as shown in FIGS. 41-4(E) to 41-4(G), the effect control CPU 120 is displayed in each frame of the image while the number of the acquisition number display 20SHK changes from "1000" to "1005". The display position of the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is moved from the right end of the display area of the image display device 5 toward the center of the first display area 20SH51. Then, when the number of the acquired number display 20SHK becomes "1005", the effect control CPU 120 displays the acquired number in the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 41-4(G). The notification display 20SHKH is stopped and displayed. At this time, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH only needs to be displayed in at least the first display area 20SH51, and may be displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52.

With such display control, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is displayed so as to frame-in from the outside to the inside of the display area of the image display device 5 .

Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH started to be displayed, the effect control CPU 120 ends the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH. In the example shown in FIG. 41-4(H), the effect control CPU 120 displays the display position of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH displayed in each frame of the video from the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. Move to the left edge of the area.

With such display control, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH is displayed so as to frame out from the inside to the outside of the display area of the image display device 5, and is no longer displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. finish.

The effect control CPU 120 considers that the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is started by displaying a part of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH when the number of the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes "Kiriban", and from that timing. Display control may be performed to end the display of the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH when a predetermined period of time has elapsed. Further, the effect control CPU 120 considers that the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH has been started by stopping and displaying the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, and for a predetermined period from that timing. display control may be performed to end the display of the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH when .

As described above, the specific area of the specific characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed in a transparent display mode. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 41-4(E) to (H), the background image during the big win can be visually recognized from the specific area of the specific characters used for the winning number notification display 20SHKH. For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 41-4(E) to (H), the background image during the big win can be seen from the specific area of the Arabic numeral "0", which is the specific character used for the winning number notification display 20SHKH.

In addition, the characters used for the number of wins notification display 20SHKH are larger in size than the characters used for the number of wins display 20SHK, as shown in FIGS. 41-4(D) to (H).

It should be noted that the effect mode when the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH is stopped and displayed in the first display area 20SH51 is not limited to the mode of frame-in the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH, stopping and then out of the frame. For example, instead of making the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH frame-in, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may be projected from the back side of the screen to the front side, or the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH may gradually emerge. Alternatively, a character may appear and the number-of-acquisitions notification display 20SHKH may be displayed in a speech balloon showing the character's lines. In addition, instead of rendering the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH out of the frame, it is possible to make the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH be sucked from the front side of the screen to the back side of the screen, or to make the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH disappear gradually. Alternatively, when the number of acquisitions notification display 20SHKH is displayed in a balloon indicating the character's lines, the character may leave.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH can be controlled to the jackpot game state. The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5 . The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 surrounding the first display area 20SH51 and narrower than the first display area 20SH51. Then, the image display device 5 can display the background image during the big win corresponding to the big win game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 can display the winning number display 20SHK related to the number of awarded balls on the front side of the background image during the big win in the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 displays, at least in the first display area 20SH51, on the front side of the background image during the big win, the number of acquisitions that informs that the number of prize balls given in the big win game state has reached the number of "Kiriban". As the notification display 20SHKH, when the number of awarded balls in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", it is possible to display the winning number notification display of "over 1000", and the prize balls given in the jackpot game state. When the number reaches "2000", it is possible to display the acquired number notification display of "over 2000". The win number display 20SHK is updated each time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state. On the other hand, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH ends when a predetermined period of time has passed since the display started. The characters used for the number-of-acquisitions notification display 20SHKH are larger in size than the characters used for the number-of-acquisitions display 20SHK. Characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. As for the specific characters used for the winning number display 20SHK, the background image during the big win cannot be visually recognized from the specific area. On the other hand, as for the specific characters used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, the background image during the big win can be visually recognized from the specific area.

According to such a configuration, the number-of-wins display 20SHK and the number-of-wins notification display 20SHKH including the specific characters can be preferably displayed in relation to the background image during the big win. For example, when the player confirms the number of winning balls in the jackpot game state, the player confirms the winning number display 20SHK. To make the background video during a big win invisible from a specific region of the specific characters, when the background video during the big win is visible from the specific region of the characters, the specific characters may look different from the original characters. Therefore, the specific characters can be recognized accurately. In addition, unlike the winning number display 20SHKH, the winning number notification display 20SHKH is not always displayed in the big win game state, but is started when the number of prize balls provided in the big win game state reaches the number of "Kiriban". It is displayed for a limited period of time to congratulate the winner, and is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area 20SH51. By doing so, it is possible to show even a little of the background image during the big win in the conspicuous display position of the first display area.

Also, as described above, the specific characters include the Arabic numerals '0', '4', '6', '8' and '9'.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display the winning number display 20SHK and the winning number notification display 20SHKH using Arabic numerals in relation to the background image during the big win.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 displays the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH while displaying the acquisition number display 20SHK.

According to such a configuration, even when the winning number notification display 20SHKH is displayed, the winning number display 20SHK allows the player to accurately grasp the number of winning balls in the big win game state.

In addition, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the acquired number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52.

According to such a configuration, the winning number notification display 20SHKH is easily visible to the player, and it is possible to preferably notify that the number of prize balls provided in the jackpot game state has reached the number of "Kiriban". .

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM on the front side of the background image during the jackpot in the second display area 20SH52. is. The characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, decorative pattern display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right-handed display 20SHM are the same type of characters as those used for the winning number display 20SHK and winning number notification display 20SHKH, and the winning number display 20SHK and Characters different from those used in the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH are included, and each type of character includes a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the character is formed. As for the specific characters used for the big win display 20SHO, decorative pattern display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, and right-handed display 20SHM, the background image during the big win cannot be visually recognized from the specific area.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to accurately recognize specific characters in the jackpot display 20SHO, the decoration symbol display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can stop and display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51, and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is frame-in to the stop position in the first display area 20SH51. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the display was started, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is framed out.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the presentation effect when the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is displayed.

(Second form of characteristic portion 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine relating to the second form of the characteristic portion 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 41-5 to 41-7. In the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the second form of the characterizing part 20SH, the specific characters used for the number-of-acquisitions notification display 20SHKH are larger than the specific characters used for the number-of-acquisitions display 20SHK for the area of the lines forming the characters. Portion size proportions small.

Hereinafter, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the second form of the characteristic portion 20SH having such characteristics will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 41-5(A) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characteristic portion 20SH.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the second form of the characterizing part 20SH uses three-dimensional characters for the acquisition number notification display. Here, a three-dimensional character is a character format that makes the character appear to protrude from the front side. The area of lines forming the three-dimensional character includes an area 20SHS21 that expresses the character and an area 20SHS22 that expresses the depth of the three-dimensional character.

Among such three-dimensional characters, there are characters corresponding to specific characters. In the example shown in FIG. 41-5(A), among the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display, ``0'', ``4'', ``6'', ``8'', and ``9'' correspond to specific characters. The specific area 20SHI3 is displayed in a transparent display mode, and when displayed in front of the background image during the big win, the background image during the big win can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI3.

(Comparison between non-three-dimensional characters and three-dimensional characters)
FIG. 41-5(B) is an explanatory diagram for comparing the non-stereoscopic characters used to display the number of wins and the three-dimensional characters used to display the number of wins.

Comparing the non-three-dimensional characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions with the three-dimensional characters used for notifying the number of acquisitions, the size of the line area 20SHI1 forming the non-three-dimensional characters and the size of the line area forming the three-dimensional characters The size of the area 20SHS21 expressing characters is the same as that of the area 20SHS21. In the non-stereoscopic specific character, the specific area 20SHI1 is the area surrounded by the inner outline of the line area 20SHI1 forming the character. On the other hand, in the three-dimensional specific character, since the region of lines forming the character includes the region 20SHS22 expressing the depth of the character, the outline of the inner circumference of the region 20SHS21 expressing the character and the The area surrounded by the outline of the area 20SHS22 that expresses the depth of the character is the specific area 20SHI3. Therefore, the three-dimensional specific characters used for acquisition number notification display are located in the area 20SHS22 expressing the depth of the characters located inside the area 20SHS21 expressing the characters, rather than the non-three-dimensional specific characters used for the acquisition number display. The size of the specific region is reduced by the size, and the ratio of the size of the specific region to the size of the line region forming the character is reduced.

(Modified example of acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 41-6(A) is a diagram showing a modified example 1 of the display mode of the Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characterizing portion 20SH.

In the example shown in FIG. 41-6(A), among the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display, ``0'', ``4'', ``6'', ``8'', and ``9'' correspond to specific characters. The specific area 20SHI4 is displayed in "white", and when it is displayed in front of the background video during the big win, the background video during the big win cannot be visually recognized from the specific region 20SHI3.

(Comparison between non-three-dimensional characters and three-dimensional characters in modification 1)
FIG. 41-6(B) is an explanatory diagram for comparing the non-stereoscopic characters used for display of the number of wins and the 3D characters used for display of the number of wins in the modified example 1. FIG.

Also in Modified Example 1, when comparing the non-stereoscopic characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions with the 3D characters used for displaying the number of acquisitions, it is found that the size of the line area 20SHI1 forming the non-stereoscopic characters and the size of the area 20SHI1 forming the 3D characters. The size of the area 20SH31 representing the character in the area of the lines is the same size. In the non-stereoscopic specific character, the specific area 20SHI1 is the area surrounded by the inner outline of the line area 20SHI1 forming the character. On the other hand, in the three-dimensional specific character, since the area of lines forming the character includes the area 20SH32 expressing the depth of the character, the outline of the inner circumference of the area 20SH31 expressing the character and the character on the inner circumference side of the area 20SH31 express the character. The area surrounded by the outline of the area 20SH32 representing the depth of the image is the specific area 20SHI4. Therefore, the three-dimensional specific characters used for acquisition number notification display are located in the area 20SH32 expressing the depth of the character located on the inner peripheral side of the area 20SH31 expressing the characters than the non-three-dimensional specific characters used for the acquisition number display. The size of the specific region is reduced by the size, and the ratio of the size of the specific region to the size of the line region forming the character is reduced.

(Modified example of acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characteristic part 20SH)
FIG. 41-7(A) is a diagram showing a modified example 2 of the display mode of the Arabic numerals used for the acquisition number notification display in the second form of the characteristic portion 20SH.

In Modified Example 2, as shown in FIG. 41-7(A), the characters used for the acquisition number notification display are displayed with three-color gradation in the area of the lines forming the characters. The combination is displayed in one of display modes A to G, which are different from each other.

The area of the line forming the character of the display mode A is colored with three color gradations: "red" for the upper area 20SHSU, "orange" for the central area 20SHSC, and "yellow" for the lower area 20SHSD. The areas of the lines forming the characters in the display mode B are colored with three gradation colors: "orange" for the upper area 20SHSU, "yellow" for the central area 20SHSC, and "green" for the lower area 20SHSD. The area of the line forming the character of the display mode C is colored with three gradations of "yellow" for the upper area 20SHSU, "green" for the central area 20SHSC, and "light blue" for the lower area 20SHSD. The areas of the lines forming the characters in the display mode D are colored with three gradation colors: "green" for the upper area 20SHSU, "light blue" for the central area 20SHSC, and "blue" for the lower area 20SHSD. The area of the line forming the character of the display mode E is colored with three color gradations: "light blue" for the upper area 20SHSU, "blue" for the central area 20SHSC, and "purple" for the lower area 20SHSD. The areas of the lines forming the characters of the display mode F are colored with three gradation colors: "blue" for the upper area 20SHSU, "purple" for the central area 20SHSC, and "red" for the lower area 20SHSD. The area of the line forming the character of the display mode G is colored with three color gradations: "purple" for the upper area 20SHSU, "red" for the central area 20SHSC, and "yellow" for the lower area 20SHSD.

The image display device 5 changes the mode of the characters used for the acquisition number notification display to display mode A→display mode B→display mode C→display mode D→display mode E→display mode F→display mode G→display mode A→ . . , and displayed while changing with time.

FIG. 41-7(B) is a diagram showing an example of a change in color accompanying the operation of displaying the number of acquisitions in Modification 2. FIG.

In modification 2, as shown in FIG. 41-7(B), when the obtained number notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, the obtained number notification display is moved (frame-in/out). The speed at which the display mode of the acquisition count notification display changes differs between when the frame is out).

In the example shown in FIG. 41-7(B), the acquired number notification display takes 0.35 seconds to move (frame-in) from the right end of the display area of the image display device 5 to the center of the first display area 20SH51. , from the display mode A to the display mode D in order. After that, the acquired number display changes from display mode D to display mode G in order while it is stopped for one second in the center of the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 and displayed. After that, the acquisition number notification display is moved (framed out) from the center of the first display area 20SH51 to the left end of the display area of the image display device 5 over 0.35 seconds, while the display modes G to C are sequentially displayed. Change.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the second form of the characterizing portion 20SH can be controlled to the jackpot game state. The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5 . The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 surrounding the first display area 20SH51 and narrower than the first display area 20SH51. Then, the image display device 5 can display the background image during the big win corresponding to the big win game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 can display the winning number display related to the number of awarded balls on the front side of the background image during the big win in the second display area 20SH52. In addition, the image display device 5 displays, at least in the first display area 20SH51, on the front side of the background image during the big win, the number of acquisitions that informs that the number of prize balls given in the big win game state has reached the number of "Kiriban". As a notification display, when the number of prize balls provided in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", it is possible to display the winning number notification display of "over 1000", and the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state. When the number reaches "2000", it is possible to display the acquisition number notification display "over 2000". The winning number display is updated each time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in the jackpot game state. On the other hand, the acquisition number notification display ends when a predetermined period of time elapses after the display is started. The characters used for the display of the number of acquisitions are larger in size than the characters used for the display of the number of acquisitions. The characters used for the display of the number of acquisitions and the display of the number of acquisitions include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. In addition, the background image during the big win cannot be visually recognized from the specific area of the specific characters used for displaying the number of wins. Further, the specific characters used for the display of the number of acquired characters have a smaller ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the area of the lines forming the characters than the specific characters used for the display of the acquired number.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display the acquisition number display and the acquisition number notification display including the specific characters in relation to the background image during the big win. For example, when the player confirms the number of prize balls in the jackpot game state, the player confirms the winning number display, but the winning number display is displayed in small size characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, and the specific characters are displayed. If the background video during the big win is visible from the specific area, the specific characters may look different from the original characters. Specific characters can be recognized accurately.

Also, the characters used for the acquisition number notification display are three-dimensional characters. The area of the lines that form the three-dimensional character includes an area that expresses the character and an area that expresses the depth of the character.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the acquisition number notification display.

In addition, as described above, the background image during the big win can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI3 of the specific characters used for the display of the number of winnings.

According to such a configuration, the winning number notification display is not always displayed in the big win game state like the winning number display, but the number of prize balls awarded in the big win game state reaches the number of "Kiriban". It is displayed only for a predetermined period of time in order to congratulate the player when the character is drawn, and is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, and the size of the line areas 20SHS21 and 20SHS22 forming the characters. Since the ratio of the size of the specific area 20SHI3 to the specific area 20SHI3 of the specific character is small, even if the background image during the big hit can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI3 of the specific character, the risk of misrecognizing the character can be suppressed. By making the background image visible during the big hit from 20SHI3, the production effect can be enhanced.

Further, as described above, in the specific character used for displaying the number of wins in the modified example 1, the background image during the big win cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI4.

According to such a configuration, the winning number notification display is not always displayed in the big win game state like the winning number display, but the number of prize balls awarded in the big win game state reaches the number of "Kiriban". It is displayed only for a predetermined period of time in the sense of congratulating the player when the character is drawn, and is displayed in a large size character in the wide first display area 20SH51, and is a specific area relative to the size of the area of the line forming the character. Since the size ratio is small, it is possible not only to suppress discomfort even if the background image during the big win is not visible from the specific area of the specific character, but also to prevent the background image during the big win from being visible from the specific area of the specific character. By doing so, it is possible to prevent misidentification of characters.

Further, as described above, the characters used for the acquisition number notification display in Modification 2 are displayed in three-color gradation in the area of the lines forming the characters. Then, the image display device 5 sets the mode of the characters used for the acquisition number notification display to display mode A→display mode B→display mode C→display mode D→display mode E→display mode F→display mode G→display mode. The display is changed over time in the order of A → . . . When the acquisition number notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 and when the acquisition number notification display is moving (frame-in/frame-out), the acquisition number notification display is changed. The speed at which the display mode changes differs.

According to such a configuration, since the display mode changes according to the moving speed of the acquisition number notification display, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

(Description of Third Mode of Characteristic Portion 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine relating to the third form of the characteristic portion 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 41-8 to 41-11. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the third form of the characteristic portion 20SH, the ending background image can be visually recognized from the specific area of the specific characters used for the result display.

Hereinafter, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the third form of the characteristic portion 20SH having such characteristics will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Arabic numerals used for result display)
FIG. 41-8 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for result display in the third form of the characteristic portion 20SH.

When the round game of the final round is finished, the pachinko game machine 1 executes an ending performance corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. At this time, the image display device 5 displays the ending background image. In addition, the image display device 5 displays a result display that notifies the total number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state while displaying the ending background image.

For the result display, numbers for displaying the total number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state and characters other than the numbers for recognizing the result display are used. The numbers used for result display are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, and the like.

Among the characters used for the result display, there are characters corresponding to specific characters. In the third form of the characteristic portion 20SH, as shown in FIG. 41-8, the specific area of the specific character used for result display is displayed in a transparent display mode. In the example shown in FIG. 41-8, the specific area 20SHI5 of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to the specific characters among the Arabic numerals used for the result display is transparent. is displayed in the display mode.

Among the characters used for result display, numbers other than Arabic numerals for displaying the total number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state and characters other than numbers for recognizing the result display are also shown in FIG. A specific area is displayed in a transparent display mode, such as the Arabic numerals indicated by -8.

(Various productions in the jackpot game state)
FIG. 41-9 is a diagram showing an example of an effect period of various effects in the jackpot game state. FIG. 41-10 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of various effects in the jackpot game state.

The effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a reservation-in-reservation advance notice suggesting control to the jackpot game state corresponding to the stored reservation information when the reservation information is stored in the jackpot game state. be. For example, in the case of a jackpot game state of all 10 rounds, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 41-9 and FIGS. At timing T1 at which a round game of 10 rounds, which is a round, is started, the reservation notice is started.

When the reservation notice is executed, the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5 corresponds to the progress of the round game in the jackpot game state, as shown in FIG. 41-10(B). In front of the background image during the big hit, the effect image of the reservation notice is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 41-10(B), the effect image 20SHE of "flame" is displayed as the effect image of the reservation notice.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 41-10(B), the effect image "flame" line is superimposed on the back side of the specific area of the specific character "0" used in the acquired number display 20SHK, Since the specific area is displayed in "white", the effect image cannot be visually recognized from the specific area. Therefore, the line of the "flame" of the effect image is not assimilated with the line forming the specific character "0" in the specific area, and the specific character "0" can be accurately recognized as the Arabic numeral "0". .

Then, as shown in FIGS. 41-9 and 41-10 (B) to (C), when the round game of the final round is finished and the ending effect is started at timing T2, the effect control CPU 120 End the Renso notice and start the ending production. When the ending effect starts, in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5, the ending background image starts to be displayed with a predetermined brightness. In the example shown in FIG. 41-10(C), in the first display area 20SH51, an ending background image of falling cherry blossoms falling from the back of the screen is displayed. In addition, in front of the ending background image, characters of "jackpot end" are displayed corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 ends the on-hold advance notice before the display of the ending background image starts at the timing T2. Therefore, when the ending background image is being displayed, the effect image 20SHE of the pending advance notice is not displayed. In other words, the effect image 20SHE of the reservation preview is displayed when the ending background image is not displayed.

The ending background image may be an image displayed at least in the first display area 20SH51, and is displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52 as shown in FIG. There may be In the example shown in FIG. 41-10(D), the falling cherry blossoms displayed as the ending background image are dancing over the entire screen.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 41-9 and 41-10 (D) to (E), at the timing T3 when the result display is started, the effect control CPU 120 sets the brightness of the ending background image to a value lower than a predetermined brightness. Reduces the brightness to a specific dark level, pauses the progress of the ending background image, and displays it as a still image. Then, the effect control CPU 120 displays the result display 20SHRE on the front side of the ending background image with brightness brighter than the specific brightness of the still image of the ending background image. In the example shown in FIG. 41-10(E), the falling cherry blossoms have stopped, and the result display 20SHRE is displayed in white characters.

As described above, the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE are displayed with the specific area 20SHI5 being transparent. Therefore, for the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE, the ending background image can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI5.

The characters used for the result display 20SHRE are larger in size than the characters used for the winning number display 20SHK, as shown in FIGS. 41-10(A), (B), and (E). The result display 20SHRE may be displayed at least in the first display area 20SH51, and is displayed across the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52 as shown in FIG. 41-10(E). It may happen.

(Suggestion of setting by ending background video)
FIG. 41-11 is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode of a setting suggesting effect using an ending background image.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured so that the probability of winning a big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 36, the winning probability of the big hit is changed by using the display result determination table according to the set value. The setting value consists of 6 stages from "1" to "6", "1" has the lowest ball rate, and "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6". The higher the value, the higher the payout rate. That is, when "1" is set as the set value, the degree of advantage for the player is the lowest, and the value increases in the order of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". Benefit increases step by step. In this embodiment, set values "1" to "3" are referred to as "low settings" and set values "4" to "6" are referred to as "high settings."

The pachinko game machine 1 relating to the third form of the characteristic portion 20SH is configured to be able to change the setting value, and is configured to be able to display the above-described ending background image as a setting suggestion effect for suggesting the setting value. For example, when the set value is low, the effect control CPU 120 displays an ending background image of falling cherry blossoms falling from the back of the screen, as shown in FIG. 41-11(A). On the other hand, when the setting value is high, the effect control CPU 120 displays an ending background image in which a large amount of falling cherry blossoms are falling from the left and right cherry trees in full bloom, as shown in FIG. 41-11(B).

It should be noted that the setting suggestion by the ending background video does not necessarily suggest whether the setting value is low or high. For example, when the setting value is low, the ending background image shown in FIG. 41-11(B) may be displayed at a sufficiently low rate, and when the setting value is high In addition, the ending background image shown in FIG. 41-11(A) may be displayed at a sufficiently low rate.

In addition, the ending background image may have different presentation modes depending on whether the setting value is "6", which is the highest advantage for the player, or when the setting value is not "6". Also, the ending background image may have a different rendering mode depending on whether the set value is an odd number or the set value is an even number.

Here, the above-mentioned Renso announcement on hold is one of a plurality of types of announcement effects for heralding the degree of reliability of a big hit, but the setting suggesting effect by the Renso announcement on hold is not executed.

As described above, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the third form of the characterizing portion 20SH can be controlled to the jackpot game state. The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5 . The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 surrounding the first display area 20SH51 and narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display the background image during the big win corresponding to progress of the round game in the big win game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. Further, the image display device 5 can display an ending background image corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state at least in the first display area 20SH51. Further, when the ending background image is not displayed, the image display device 5 controls the big win game state in response to the hold information stored on the front side of the background image during the big win in the second display area 20SH52. It is possible to display an effect image 20SHE of a reservation advance notice suggesting that it will be held. In addition, the image display device 5 can display the winning number display 20SHK related to the number of awarded balls on the front side of the background image during the big win in the second display area 20SH52. In addition, when the ending background image is displayed, the image display device 5 displays a result in front of the ending background image in at least the first display area 20SH51 to notify the total number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state. Display 20SHRE can be displayed. The characters used for the result display 20SHRE are larger in size than the characters used for the winning number display 20SHK. The characters used in the winning number display 20SHK and the result display 20SHRE include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. As for the specific characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK, the background image during the big win and the effect image 20SHRE for notifying the reservation are not visible from the specific area. On the other hand, for the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE, the ending background image can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI5.

According to such a configuration, the acquisition number display 20SHK including the specific characters can be preferably displayed in relation to the background image during the big win and the effect image 20SHE of the notice of the reservation. can be preferably displayed in relation to the ending background image. For example, when the player confirms the number of winning balls in the jackpot game state, the player confirms the winning number display 20SHK. Since it may overlap with the effect image 20SHE of the Sho notice, if the background image during the big hit or the effect image 20SHE of the reservation notice is visible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character will look different from the original character. However, by making the background image during the big win and the effect image 20SHE of the notice of the reservation inside the reservation invisible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character can be recognized accurately. On the other hand, the result display 20SHRE is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area 20SH51, and since it does not overlap with the effect image 20SHE of the reservation notice, the ending background image is visible from the specific area of the specific characters. By making it possible, it is possible to show the ending background image even a little in the conspicuous display position of the first display area 20SH51.

Further, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can set one of a plurality of types of setting values "1" to "6" with different jackpot winning probabilities. The image display device 5 can display the ending background image in a manner suggesting the set value. The effect image 20SHRE of the pending notice is one of a plurality of types of notice effects for predicting the degree of reliability of the big win, but the setting suggesting effect by the pending notice is not executed.

According to such a configuration, since there is a possibility that a setting suggesting effect by the ending background image is executed, it is significant that the ending background image can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI5 of the specific character used for the result display 20SHRE. increase.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 starts displaying the ending background image with a predetermined brightness. Then, at the timing T3 when the result display 20SHRE is started to be displayed, the image display device 5 pauses and displays the ending background image with a specific brightness darker than the predetermined brightness, and also displays the ending background video with a brightness brighter than the specific brightness. Display the result display 20SHRE.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the visibility of the result display 20SHRE.

(Description of Fourth Mode of Characteristic Portion 20SH)
Next, a gaming machine relating to the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 41-12 to 41-16. In the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the fourth form of the characteristic part 20SH, the remaining number of times display relating to the remaining number of times of the ST number in the variable probability state, and when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times, the predetermined number of times is notified. and the remaining number of times notification display can be displayed. The characters used for the remaining number display and the remaining number notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed. The specific character used to display the remaining number of times is such that the background image during the ST cannot be visually recognized from the specific area. The background image in the ST can be visually recognized from the specific area of the specific characters used for the display of the number of remaining times.

Hereinafter, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH having such characteristics will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Background Art Related to Fourth Form of Characteristic Portion 20SH)
41-12 are diagrams showing background art related to the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH.

In a pachinko machine, basically, when comparing a state that is advantageous to the player, such as a variable probability state, a time-saving state, and a jackpot game state, and a normal state, the game is played in the normal state rather than the period in which the game is played in the advantageous state. is designed to be longer.

For example, in a pachinko machine, regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game, when the upper limit number of pending information is stored, when the upper limit number of pending information is not stored. A shortened variation with a shorter variable display time is more likely to be executed. And, in the probability variable state with the time reduction control, since the variable winning ball device changes to the open state, winning is more likely than in the normal state, so the shortening variation is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and faster than in the normal state. It is possible to progress the game. Therefore, the period during which the game is played in the normal state is longer than the period during which the game is played in the variable probability state accompanied by the time saving control.

In the variable probability control, after the end of the jackpot game state, either the condition of when the special game of the predetermined number of times is executed or when the display result of the variable display becomes "big hit" is met first. end when Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display does not become a "big hit" while the variable probability control is being performed, the variable probability control ends when the special figure game of the predetermined number of STs is consumed. . Note that the predetermined number of STs is, for example, 70 times.

Further, by performing the time saving control, the variable display time of the special symbols in the special symbol game is shortened compared to when the time saving control is not performed. In the time-saving control, after the end of the jackpot game state, one of the following conditions is established first: that the special game is executed for a predetermined number of time-saving times, or that the display result of the variable display becomes a "big hit". end when Therefore, even if the display result of the variable display does not become a "jackpot" when the time saving control is performed, the time saving control ends when the special game of the predetermined number of time saving times is completed. . In addition, the predetermined number of times of time saving is, for example, 70 times.

In addition, it is good also as a value different from the setting value of the number of times of ST, and the setting value of the number of times of time saving.

When the pachinko game machine is controlled to the variable probability state, as shown in FIG. 41-12 (A), there is a case where the remaining number display regarding the remaining number of ST times in the variable probability state is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 41-12(A), the remaining number display of "30 remaining times" is displayed corresponding to the remaining number of ST times being 30 times.

For the display of the remaining number of times, a number for displaying the remaining number of STs and characters other than the number for recognizing the display of the remaining number of times are used. The numbers used to display the remaining number of times are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, and the like. The remaining number display shown in FIG. 41-12(A) includes the characters "remaining" and "times" for recognizing that it is the remaining number display, and "30" for displaying the remaining number of STs. and numbers are used.

Among the characters used for displaying the remaining number of times, there is a specific character in which a specific area is formed.

In addition, when the pachinko game machine is controlled to the variable probability state, as shown in FIG. do. In the example shown in FIG. 41-12(A), the background image during ST is displayed in such a manner that the screen is cracked. The ST background image is an image displayed on the back side of other displays displayed on the image display device in the variable probability state. The background image in the ST includes many lines representing animation pictures and effects.

The display of the remaining number of times is displayed in a small size in an end area that does not impede the visibility of the variable display of decorative symbols in the display area of the image display device. If the ST background image changes over time, the line of the ST background image may overlap behind the display of the remaining number of times. Then, when a specific character is displayed in the remaining count display, ST is displayed on the back of the specific area of the specific character, such as the part of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 41-12(A). When the lines of the medium image overlap, the lines of the background image in the ST may be assimilated with the lines forming the specific character, and the specific character may appear to be different from the original character.

FIG. 41-12(B) is an enlarged view of the portion of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 41-12(A). In the examples shown in FIGS. 41-12 (A) and (B), the line of the background image during the ST is superimposed on the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used for displaying the number of remaining times, and the background image during the ST merges with the line forming the specific character "0" so that the specific character "0" looks like the Arabic numeral "8" instead of the Arabic numeral "0".

In this way, if the character of the remaining number display is mistakenly recognized as a character different from the original character, the remaining number of STs in the variable probability state cannot be accurately recognized. However, for example, it is difficult to adjust the position of the line of the ST background image so that the line of the ST background image does not overlap the specific area of the specific character.

The fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH has been made in view of such a background, and the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH will be described below.

(Remaining count display in the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH)
FIG. 41-13 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for displaying the remaining number of times in the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH.

In the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH, the specific area 20SHI6 of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to the specific characters among the Arabic numerals used for displaying the remaining number of times is , is displayed in a non-transparent display mode, which is different from the display mode of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. In the example shown in FIG. 41-13, the color of the line 20SHS6 of the Arabic numerals used for displaying the number of remaining times is "black", whereas the specific characters "0", "4", "6", " The specific areas 20SHI6 of 8" and "9" are displayed in "white", and when displayed in front of the background image during the ST, the background image during the ST cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI6.

In addition, the display mode of the specific area 20SHI6 is not limited to a color different from the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the pun, and the characters are displayed to the extent that the specific area 20SHI6 and the line 20SHS6 forming the character can be accurately distinguished. Any display mode having a high contrast with respect to the display mode of the line 20SHS6 to be formed may be used.

For example, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color with a high contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. In that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be brightness with a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture with a low contrast with respect to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture having a low contrast with respect to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters.

Further, for example, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be brightness with a high contrast with respect to the brightness of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color with a low contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture with a low contrast with respect to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture having a low contrast with respect to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters.

Further, for example, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be texture that has a high contrast with the texture of the line 20SHS6 that forms the character. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color with a low contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be brightness with a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture having a low contrast with respect to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters.

Also, for example, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture having a high contrast with respect to the texture of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. In that case, the color of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a color with a low contrast with respect to the color of the line 20SHS6 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the brightness of the specific region 20SHI6 may be brightness with a low contrast with respect to the brightness of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Also, in that case, the texture of the specific region 20SHI6 may be a texture with a low contrast with respect to the texture of the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters.

Of the characters used to display the remaining number of times, numbers other than Arabic numerals for displaying the remaining number of STs, and specific characters among characters other than numbers for making the remaining number of times displayed are shown in the figure. Like the Arabic numerals shown in 41-13, the specific area is displayed in a non-transparent display mode that is different from the display mode of the lines forming the characters.

(Remaining count notification display in the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH)
FIG. 41-14 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of Arabic numerals used for the display of the number of remaining runs in the fourth form of the characterizing portion 20SH.

When the remaining number indicated by the remaining number display reaches a predetermined number, the pachinko game machine 1 displays a remaining number notification display for notifying the predetermined number.

When the number of remaining times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times, the remaining number of times notification display includes a number for displaying the predetermined number of times, and characters other than the number for making the remaining number of times notification display recognizable. and are used. The numerals used for the remaining number notification display are, for example, Arabic numerals, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 41-14, the display of the number of remaining times is displayed in a plurality of modes with different transmittances. The remaining number of times notification display shown in FIG. 41-14(A) is a display mode in which the line area forming the characters of the remaining number of times notification display is not transparent, and the background of the characters cannot be seen from the line area. The remaining number of times notification display shown in FIG. 41-14(B) is a display mode in which the line area forming the characters of the remaining number of times notification display is transparent, and the background of the characters can be seen through the line area.

In addition, the remaining number of times notification display is displayed in three-dimensional characters. In the display mode in which the character background is not visible, the line area forming the three-dimensional character includes an area 20SHS71 that expresses the character and an area 20SHS72A that expresses the depth of the three-dimensional character. In the display mode in which the background of the character is visible, the area 20SHS71 for expressing the character is transparently displayed. This area is displayed as an area 20SHS72B representing the bottom surface of the three-dimensional character.

Among such three-dimensional characters, there are characters corresponding to specific characters. In the example shown in FIG. 41-14, the specific areas of "0", "4", "6", "8", and "9" corresponding to the specific characters among the three-dimensional Arabic numerals used for the remaining count notification display 20SHI7 is displayed in a transparent display mode, and when displayed in front of the ST background image, the ST background image can be visually recognized from the specific region 20SHI7.

As shown in FIG. 41-14, the specific area 20SHI7 for the remaining number of times notification display differs depending on whether the remaining number of times notification display is displayed in a non-transmissive manner or in a transparent manner. In the example shown in FIG. 41-14, the remaining count notification display is displayed in an opaque manner, and since the area of the lines forming the characters includes the area 20SHS72A expressing the depth of the characters, the area expressing the characters A specific area 20SHI7 is an area surrounded by the outline of the inner circumference of 20SHS71 and the outline of the area 20SHS72A that expresses the depth of the character located on the inner circumference side. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 41-14(B), the remaining count notification display is displayed in a transparent manner, and since the area 20SHS71 representing characters is transparently displayed, the bottom surface of the three-dimensional character is expressed. The area surrounded by the inner outline of the area 20SHS72B is the specific area 20SHI7.

(Appearance of Remaining Count Display in Fourth Form of Characteristic Portion 20SH)
FIG. 41-15(A) is a diagram showing how the remaining number display in the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH looks. FIG. 41-15(B) is an enlarged view of the portion of the Arabic numeral "0" surrounded by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 41-15(A).

In the examples shown in FIGS. 41-15 (A) and (B), the line of the ST background image is superimposed on the back of the specific area of the specific character "0" used in the remaining number display 20SHST, but the specific area Since 20SHI6 is displayed in "white", the background image in the ST cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI6. Therefore, the specific region 20SHI6 is not assimilated with the line 20SHHS2 of the background image in the ST, and the specific character "0" can be accurately recognized as the Arabic numeral "0".

In addition to the remaining count display 20SHST, the image display device 5 displays a winning count display 20SHK, a right-handed display 20SHM, and a variable probability display 20SHRU for recognizing that the variable probability state is controlled. there is Acquisition number display 20SHK, right-handed display 20SHM, probability variation display 20SHRU are also displayed small in the end area of the display area of the image display device 5 so as not to impede the visibility of the decoration pattern, like the remaining number display 20SHST.

The characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK, the right-handed display 20SHM, and the probability display 20SHRU are the same type of characters as the characters used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display, and the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display. It may contain different types of characters than the characters that can be used. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41-17, "numbers", "hiragana" and "kanji" are used for the remaining number display 20SHST and remaining number notification display 20SHSTH. On the other hand, the variable probability display 20SHRU uses "alphabet" which is a different type of characters from the characters used in the remaining count display 20SHST and the remaining count notification display 20SHSTH. In addition, the acquisition number display 20SHK includes "numbers" which are the same type of characters as the characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST and remaining number notification display 20SHSTH, and the characters used for the remaining number display 20SHST and remaining number notification display 20SHSTH. A different type of character, katakana, is used. In addition, the right-handed display 20SHM includes "hiragana" and "kanji" which are the same type of characters as the characters used in the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number reporting display 20SHSTH, and the remaining number display 20SHST and remaining number reporting display 20SHSTH. "Symbols", which are different types of characters from the characters used, are used.

Among the characters used for the winning number display 20SHK, the right-hand hitting display 20SHM, and the odd probability display 20SHRU, there are characters corresponding to specific characters regardless of the type of the character. The specific areas of the specific characters used for the winning number display 20SHK, the right hitting display 20SHM, and the odds display 20SHRU are also in a non-transparent display mode, similar to the specific area 20SHI6 for the remaining number display 20SHST, and the lines 20SHS6 forming the characters. Since it is displayed in a display mode different from the display mode, the background image during the ST cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI6.

(Example of effect operation of remaining count display and remaining count notification display in the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH)
FIG. 41-16 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the relationship between the variable display in the fourth form of the characteristic portion 20SH and the change in the display mode of the remaining count notification display. FIG. 41-17 is a diagram showing an effect operation example of the remaining number display and the remaining number notification display in the first form of the characteristic portion 20SH.

As shown in FIG. 41-17, the effect control CPU 120 displays the remaining number display 20SHST in the second display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 41-17 (A) to (B), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the number for displaying the remaining number of STs of the remaining number display 20 SHST each time the variable display is executed. to display.

As shown in FIGS. 41-16 and 41-17 (A) to (B), the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display becomes a predetermined number of times. The remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH for notifying the predetermined number of times is started to be displayed in a non-transmissive display mode. For example, the effect control CPU 120 notifies the number of times when the variable display of 60 times, 50 times, 40 times, 30 times, 20 times, and 10 times indicated by the remaining number display is started. The display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is started in a non-transmissive display mode. As shown in FIGS. 41-17B to 41-17D, the characters used for the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are larger in size than the characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 41-17, when the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, the acquisition number display 20SHK is also displayed, but the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is a display in which the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed. It is displayed in a display area different from the area. Then, as shown in FIGS. 41-16 and 41-17 (B) to (C), when the first period has passed since the display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH has started, the effect control CPU 120 The display mode of the number of times notification display 20SHSTH is changed from a non-transmissive display mode to a transparent display mode. Then, as shown in FIGS. 41-16 and 41-17 (B) to (E), when the second period has passed since the display mode of the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH is changed, the effect control CPU 120 The display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is terminated.

Here, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can perform variable display based on a plurality of types of variation patterns with different variable display times.

The remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is a display for notifying the predetermined number of times when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches the predetermined number of times. Therefore, if the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed over a plurality of variable displays, there is a possibility that the remaining number of STs may be misunderstood.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the first period and the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are displayed in a display mode in which the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is not transparent so that the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH can be terminated in one variable display. The total period including the second period of display in the transmissive display mode is set to be shorter than the variable display time of the type of variation pattern having the shortest variable display time.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 41-16, in the variable display in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display is the predetermined number of times, no matter which type of variable display is executed based on the variation pattern, The display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH can be ended in the one variable display.

Here, the first display area 20SH51 includes the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R described above. On the other hand, the number-of-remaining notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in front of the identification information in at least the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the first display area 20SH51. Therefore, if the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed while the non-transmissive remaining time information display 20SHSTH is being displayed, there is a possibility that the display result cannot be recognized.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to allow the user to recognize the display result of the variable display, the first period in which the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in a non-transmissive display mode is a variation pattern with the shortest variable display time. is set to end before the timing at which the display result in the variable display is derived.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 41-16, in the variable display in which the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display is the predetermined number of times, no matter which type of variable display is executed based on the variation pattern, The display result of the variable display can be favorably recognized.

In the example shown in FIG. 41-17(D), the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed when the display result of the variable display is derived. Because of the change, the identification information behind the characters can be visually recognized from the area of the lines forming the characters of the remaining count notification display 20SHSTH.

In this embodiment, change in the display mode of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is controlled so that the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed in a transparent display mode when the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed. However, when the pseudo continuous effect is executed in the variable display where the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number display 20SHST is a predetermined number of times, when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbols, the remaining number of times is displayed. The notification display 20SHSTH may be displayed in a transparent display mode.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the fourth form of the characterizing portion 20SH can be controlled to a probability variable state accompanied by time-saving control that allows the game to proceed faster than the normal state. The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5 . The display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 surrounding the first display area 20SH51 and narrower than the first display area 20SH51. The image display device 5 can display the ST background image in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. Further, the image display device 5 can display a remaining number display 20SHST relating to the remaining number of STs in the variable probability state on the front side of the ST background image in the second display area 20SH52. Further, the image display device 5 displays the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times displayed on the front side of the ST background image in at least the first display area 20SH51. As the display 20SHSTH, there is a remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH that notifies "60" when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST reaches 60, and "When the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST reaches 50" 50” can be displayed. The remaining number display 20SHST is updated each time the variable display is performed. On the other hand, the display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH ends when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of display. The characters used for the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH are larger in size than the characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST. The characters used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH include specific areas surrounded by lines forming the characters. As for the specific characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST, the background image during the ST cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI6. On the other hand, as for the specific characters used for the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH, the background video during the ST can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI7.

According to such a configuration, the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH including the specific characters can be preferably displayed in relation to the ST background image. For example, when the player confirms the remaining ST number in the variable probability state, the remaining number display 20SHST is confirmed, but the remaining number display 20SHST is displayed in small size characters in the narrow second display area 20SH52, If the background image in the ST is visible from the specific area 20SHI6 of the specific character, the specific character may look different from the original character, but the background image in the ST cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI6 of the specific character. By doing so, the specific character can be accurately recognized. Further, the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is not always displayed like the remaining number of times display 20SHST. It is displayed only for a period of time, and is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area 20SH51. At the conspicuous display position of the display area 20SH51, it is possible to show even a little of the background image during the ST.

Further, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the characters used for the number-of-remaining notification display 20SHSTH in a transparent display mode in which the image on the back side can be seen through the lines forming the characters. be.

According to such a configuration, since the background image can be visually recognized when the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, it is possible to prevent unnecessary stress from being given to the player.

In addition, as described above, the first display area 20SH51 includes the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The image display device 5 can display the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH on the front side of the decorative design in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

According to such a configuration, the variable display of the decoration pattern can be visually recognized when the remaining count notification display 20SHSTH is displayed, so that unnecessary stress can be prevented from being given to the player. .

Further, as described above, when the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed, the image display device 5 displays it in a display mode in which the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is transparent.

According to such a configuration, even if the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed while the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is being displayed, the display result of the variable display can be recognized.

In addition, as described above, the image display device 5 can display the winning number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded balls. Then, the image display device 5 displays the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH in a display area different from the display area where the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the obtained number display 20SHK from deteriorating due to the display of the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH.

In the above description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set. The present invention is also applied to a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player when the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button. It is possible.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 20SH)
(1) The gaming machine according to the first form of the characterizing part 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled in a jackpot game state). etc.), display means (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a display area around the first display area. a second display area narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 is the first display area 20SH51 and the area around the first display area 20SH51); and a second display area 20SH52 narrower than the first display area 20SH51), the display means displays a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area. Displayable (for example, the image display device 5 can display a background image during the big win corresponding to the big win gaming state in the first display region 20SH51 and the second display region 20SH52, etc.), and the second display In the area, it is possible to display a given amount display related to the given amount of game value given in front of the background image (for example, the image display device 5 can display the background video during the big win in the second display area 20SH52. (20 SHK, etc., can be displayed on the front side), and at least in the first display area, in front of the background image, the amount of game value provided is a predetermined amount. As a notification display for notifying that the amount of game value provided has reached the first predetermined amount, and a first notification display that indicates that the amount of game value provided has reached the second predetermined amount. (For example, the image display device 5 displays at least in the first display area 20SH51 the number of prize balls given in the big win game state on the front side of the background image during the big win. Acquisition number notification display 20SHKH for notifying that the number of "Kiriban" has been reached, and when the number of awarded balls given in the jackpot game state reaches "1000", the acquisition number notification display "1000 over" is displayed. display is possible, and when the number of prize balls given in the jackpot game state reaches "2000", it is possible to display the winning number notification display of "over 2000", etc.); It is updated each time a game value is given in the advantageous state (for example, the winning number display 20SHK is displayed when game balls are paid as prize balls in the jackpot game state). updated each time it is displayed, etc.), and the notification display ends when a specific period has elapsed since the display started (for example, the acquired number notification display 20SHKH such as ending the display when a predetermined period of time has elapsed), and the characters used for the notification display are characters of a size larger than the characters used for the display of the amount to be given (for example, used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH). The characters used for the display of the number of acquisitions 20SHK are larger in size than the characters used for the display, etc.), and the characters used for the display of the amount to be given and the notification display have a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters including specific characters formed (for example, the characters used in the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed, etc.); The specific characters used to display the award amount are such that the background image cannot be visually recognized from the specific area (for example, the specific characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK are such that the background image during the big hit cannot be visually recognized from the specific area. etc.), the specific character used for the notification display is such that the background image can be visually recognized from the specific area (for example, the specific character used for the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is such that the background image during the big win is visible from the specific area. possible, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately display the application amount display and the notification display including the specific characters in relation to the background image. For example, when a player confirms the amount of gaming value that has been granted in an advantageous state, the player confirms the display of the amount to be awarded. If the background image is visible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character may look different from the original character. Specific characters can be recognized accurately. In addition, the notification display is not always displayed in an advantageous state like the award amount display, but is intended to congratulate the player when the amount of game value imparted in the advantageous state reaches a predetermined amount. It is displayed only for a predetermined period, and since it is displayed with large size characters in the wide first display area, the background image is made visible from the specific area of the specific characters, which is called the first display area. It is possible to show the background image even a little at a conspicuous display position.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, the specific characters include Arabic numerals 0, 4, 6, 8, and 9 (for example, the specific characters are Arabic numerals "0", "4", " 6", "8", "9", etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately display the application amount display and notification display using Arabic numerals in relation to the background image.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, the display means displays the notification display while displaying the display of the amount to be awarded (for example, the image display device 5 displays the obtained number It is also possible to display the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH while the display 20SHK is being displayed.

According to such a configuration, even when the information display is displayed, it is possible to accurately grasp the amount of the game value given in the jackpot game state by the display of the amount of giving.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, the display means can display the notification display in the first display area and the second display area (for example, an image The display device 5 may be capable of displaying the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52.

According to such a configuration, the notification display becomes more noticeable to the player, and it is possible to suitably notify that the amount of game value awarded in an advantageous state has reached the predetermined amount.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4) above, the display means can display a specific display regarding the advantageous state in front of the background image in the second area ( For example, the image display device 5 can display the big win display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the number of rounds display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM on the front side of the background image during the big win in the second display area 20SH52. , the characters used for the specific display include characters of the same type as the characters used for the application amount display and the notification display, and characters different from the characters used for the application amount display and the notification display. , Any type of character includes a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the character is formed (for example, used for jackpot display 20SHO, decorative pattern display 20SHZ, round number display 20SHR, right-handed display 20SHM) The characters used include the same type of characters as the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH, and the characters different from the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK and the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH. The type of character also includes a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the character is formed, etc.), the specific character used for the specific display is such that the background image cannot be visually recognized from the specific area. (For example, the specific characters used for the jackpot display 20SHO, the decorative pattern display 20SHZ, the round number display 20SHR, and the right-handed display 20SHM are such that the background image during the jackpot cannot be visually recognized from a specific area, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the specific character can be accurately recognized even for the specific display.

(6) The gaming machine according to the second form of the characterizing part 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, it can be controlled in a jackpot game state), and display means (For example, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means is a first display area and an area around the first display area. a second display area that is narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and an area around the first display area 20SH51 that is the first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 narrower than ), and the display means can display a background image corresponding to the advantageous state in the first display area and the second display area (for example, , the image display device 5 can display a background video during a big win corresponding to a big win gaming state in the first display region 20SH51 and the second display region 20SH52, etc.), and the background video in the second display region (For example, the image display device 5 can display a given amount display related to the given amount of game value given on the front side of the given game value (for example, the image display device 5 can display the given amount on the front side of the background image during the big win in the second display area 20SH52. (e.g., the number of winning balls can be displayed), and at least in the first display area, on the front side of the background image, a notification that the amount of game value provided has reached a predetermined amount. As displays, there are a first notification display for notifying that the amount of given game value has reached the first predetermined amount, and a second notification display for notifying that the amount of given game value has reached the second predetermined amount. (For example, the image display device 5 can display the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game state in front of the background image during the jackpot in at least the first display area 20SH51. When the number of awarded balls reaches ``1000'' in the jackpot game state, the win count notice display of ``over 1000'' can be displayed as the win count notification display for notifying that the player has won the jackpot game state. When the number of awarded balls reaches "2000", it is possible to display the acquired number notification display such as "over 2000"). (For example, the winning number display is updated each time a game ball is paid out as a prize ball in a jackpot game state, etc.). display is terminated when a specific period of time has elapsed since the start of the display (for example, the display of the number of acquisitions is terminated when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the display was started), and the notification display is larger than the characters used to display the awarded amount (for example, the characters used to display the number of acquisitions are larger than the characters used to display the number of acquisitions). etc.), the characters used for the display of the amount to be given and the notification display include specific characters in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters is formed (for example, (e.g., a specific character that forms a specific area surrounded by lines forming the character). Yes (for example, the specific character used to display the number of acquisitions is such that the background image during the big win cannot be visually recognized from the specific area, etc.), and the specific character used for the notification display is the specific character used for the display of the awarded amount. The ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the area of the line forming the character is smaller than that of The ratio of the size of the specific region to the size of the region of the line forming the is small, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately display the application amount display and the notification display including the specific characters in relation to the background image. For example, when a player confirms the amount of gaming value that has been granted in an advantageous state, the player confirms the display of the amount to be awarded. If the background image is visible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character may look different from the original character. Specific characters can be recognized accurately.

(7) In the gaming machine of (6) above, the characters used for the notification display are three-dimensional characters (for example, the characters used for the acquisition number notification display are three-dimensional characters), and the three-dimensional characters are The line area to be formed may include an area representing a character and an area representing the depth of the character.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the notification display.

(8) In the gaming machine of (6) or (7) above, the specific character used for the notification display is such that the background image can be visually recognized from the specific area (for example, the specific character used for the acquisition number notification display). , the background video during the big win can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI3, etc.).

According to such a configuration, the notification display is not always displayed in an advantageous state like the award amount display, but is displayed when the amount of the game value imparted in the advantageous state reaches a predetermined amount. It is displayed only for a predetermined period in the meaning of congratulating a person, is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area, and the ratio of the size of the specific area to the size of the line area forming the characters is small, it is possible to reduce the risk of misidentifying the characters even if the background image is visible from the specific area of the specific character. can increase

(9) In the gaming machine of (6) or (7) above, the specific character used for the notification display is such that the background image cannot be visually recognized from the specific area (for example, the acquisition number notification display in Modification 1). The specific character used in the above may be such that the background image during the big hit cannot be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI4.

According to such a configuration, the winning number notification display is not always displayed in the big win game state like the winning number display, but the number of prize balls awarded in the big win game state reaches the number of "Kiriban". It is displayed only for a predetermined period of time in the sense of congratulating the player when the character is drawn, and is displayed in a large size character in the wide first display area 20SH51, and is a specific area relative to the size of the area of the line forming the character. Since the size ratio is small, it is possible to suppress discomfort even if the background image is not visible from the specific area of the specific character. can be prevented from being misidentified.

(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above, the display means can change the mode of the notification display to a specific mode (for example, the image display device 5 can display the acquired number The notification display 20SHKH can be stopped and displayed in the first display area 20SH51, etc.), and when the specific period has passed since the notification display mode changed to the specific mode, the notification display mode is changed. Change to a mode different from the specific mode (for example, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is framed in to the stop position in the first display area 20SH51, the acquisition number notification display 20SHKH is framed out. etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the presentation effect when the notification display is displayed.

(11) In the gaming machine of (10) above, the characters used for the notification display are displayed in a plurality of colors in the line regions forming the characters (for example, the modification of the characteristic portion 20SH in the second mode). 2, the line area forming the characters is displayed in three-color gradation, etc.), and the display means changes the combination of the plurality of types of colors over time. (For example, the image display device 5 can display the character modes used for the acquisition number notification display in the following manner: display mode A → display mode B → display mode C → display mode D → display mode E → display mode F → display mode G → display mode A → . The speed at which the combination of the plurality of types of colors changes differs depending on whether the number of acquisitions notification display is stopped in the first display area 20SH51 of the image display device 5 or when the number of acquisitions notification display is stopped. The speed at which the acquisition number notification display changes may differ depending on whether the player is moving (frame-in/frame-out).

According to such a configuration, since the display mode changes according to the moving speed of the notification display, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

(12) The gaming machine according to the fourth form of the characterizing part 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state that allows the game to progress faster than the normal state (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 It is possible to control to a variable probability state with time saving control that can progress the game faster than the normal state, etc.), display means (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with an image display device 5, etc.). The display area of the display means includes a first display area and a second display area surrounding the first display area and narrower than the first display area (for example, an image display device 5 includes a first display area 20SH51 and a second display area 20SH52 surrounding the first display area 20SH51 and narrower than the first display area 20SH51, etc.), the display means , the background image corresponding to the special state can be displayed in the first display area and the second display area (for example, the image display device 5 can display the background image in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52 , the background image can be displayed during ST, etc.), and in the second display area, in front of the background image, it is possible to display the number of fluctuations display regarding the number of fluctuations in the special state (for example, an image display device 5, in the second display area 20SH52, on the front side of the background image during ST, the remaining number display 20SHST regarding the remaining number of ST number in the probability changing state can be displayed, etc.), at least in the first display area, In front of the background image, as a frequency notification display for notifying the number of times of change when the value of the display of the number of times of change reaches a predetermined value, the number of times of change is notified when the value of the display of the number of times of change reaches a first predetermined value. It is possible to display a first number of times notification display and a second number of times notification display that notifies the number of times of change when the value of the change number of times display reaches a second predetermined value (for example, the image display device 5 may display at least the first In the 1 display area 20SH51, when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display reaches a predetermined number of times on the front side of the ST background image, a remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is displayed by the remaining number of times display 20SHST to notify the predetermined number of times. A remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH that notifies "60" when the remaining number of times displayed by the remaining number of times reaches 60, and a remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH that notifies "50" when the remaining number of times indicated by the remaining number of times display 20SHST reaches 50. , etc.), the display of the number of times of change is updated each time the variable display is executed. (For example, the remaining number of times display 20SHST is updated each time the variable display is executed, etc.), and the number of times notification display ends when a specific period elapses after starting the display ( For example, the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH ends the display when a predetermined period has passed since the display started), and the characters used for the number of times notification display are more than the characters used for the variation number display. Large size characters (for example, the characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHSTH should be larger than the characters used for the remaining number of times display 20SHST), and the number of fluctuations display and the number of times notification display The characters used include specific characters forming a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters (for example, the characters used for the remaining number display 20SHST and the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH are surrounded by lines forming the characters). The specific character used for the display of the number of fluctuations is such that the background image cannot be visually recognized from the specific region (for example, the specific character used for the remaining number display 20 SHST is the specific region 20SHI6 to ST background video cannot be visually recognized, etc.), and the specific character used for the number of times notification display is such that the background image can be visually recognized from the specific area The specific characters are characterized in that the background image in the ST can be visually recognized from the specific area 20SHI7.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display the change count display and the count notification display including the specific characters in relation to the background image. For example, when the player confirms the number of fluctuations in the special state, the number of fluctuations is displayed in small size characters in the narrow second display area. If the background image is visible, the specific characters may look different from the original characters, but by making the background image invisible from the specific area of the specific characters, the specific characters are accurately recognized. be able to. In addition, the number notification display is not always displayed like the variable number display, but is limited to a specific period in the sense of alerting the player that the remaining number indicated by the variable number display reaches a predetermined number. Since it is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area, by making the background image visible from the specific area of the specific characters, in the conspicuous display position of the first display area, It is possible to show the background image even a little.

(13) In the gaming machine of (12) above, the display means can display the characters used for the number-of-times notification display in a transmissive mode in which an image on the back side can be seen through an area of lines forming the characters. (For example, the image display device 5 can display the characters used for the remaining count notification display 20SHSTH in a transparent display mode in which the image on the back side can be seen through the lines forming the characters. etc).

According to such a configuration, since the background image can be visually recognized while the count notification display is being displayed, it is possible to prevent unnecessary stress from being given to the player.

(14) In the gaming machine of (13) above, the first display area includes a variable display area in which identification information is variably displayed (for example, the first display area 20SH51 is "left", "middle", including the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, etc.), the display means can display the number of times notification display on the front side of the identification information in the variable display area (for example, , the image display device 5 can display the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH on the front side of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to visually recognize the variable display of the identification information while displaying the number-of-games notification display, so that unnecessary stress can be prevented from being given to the player.

(15) In the gaming machine of (14) above, when the identification information is displayed in a recognizable manner, the display means displays the number of times notification display in the transparent mode (for example, the image display device 5 can (When the display result of the display is derived and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which the remaining number of times notification display 20SHSTH is transparent.).

According to such a configuration, even if the identification information is displayed in a recognizable manner while the number-of-times notification display is being displayed, the display result of the variable display can be recognized.

(16) In the gaming machine according to any one of (12) to (15) above, the display means is capable of displaying a given amount display relating to the given amount of game value that has been given (for example, the image display device 5 , can display the winning number display 20SHK related to the number of awarded balls, etc.), and display the number of times notification display (for example, image display The device 5 displays the remaining number notification display 20SHSTH in a display area different from the display area where the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the application amount display from deteriorating due to the display of the number of times notification display.

(17) The gaming machine according to the first form of the characterizing part 20SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled in a jackpot game state). etc.), display means (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5, etc.), and the display area of the display means includes a first display area and a display area around the first display area. a second display area narrower than the first display area (for example, the display area of the image display device 5 is the first display area 20SH51 and the area around the first display area 20SH51); and a second display area 20SH52 narrower than the first display area 20SH51, etc.), the display means indicates that the advantageous state is progressing in the first display area and the second display area. (For example, the image display device 5 can display the first background image corresponding to the progress of the round game in the jackpot game state in the first display area 20SH51 and the second display area 20SH52. background video can be displayed during a big hit, etc.), and at least in the first display area, a second background video corresponding to the end of the advantageous state can be displayed (for example, the image display device 5 can display at least In the first display area 20SH51, the ending background image corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state can be displayed, etc.), when the second background image is not displayed, in the second display area, the In front of the first background image, it is possible to display a specific suggestion image that suggests the progress of the game (for example, the image display device 5 can display , on the front side of the background image during the big win, it is possible to display the effect image 20SHE of the notice of the pending game, which suggests that it will be controlled to the big win game state corresponding to the stored pending information, etc.); In the second display area, it is possible to display, in front of the first background image, a given amount display regarding the given amount of game value given (for example, the image display device 5 can display the following in the second display area 20SH52 In the front side of the background image during the big win, it is possible to display the winning number display 20SHK regarding the number of awarded balls, etc.), and when the second background image is displayed, at least in the first display area, Notification of the amount of game value given in the advantageous state on the front side of the second background image (For example, when the ending background image is being displayed, the image display device 5 can display the ending background image in front of the ending background image in at least the first display area 20SH51. The result display 20 SHRE that informs the total number of awarded balls can be displayed, etc.), and the characters used for the result notification display are larger in size than the characters used for the awarded amount display (for example, The characters used for the result display 20SHRE should be larger than the characters used for the acquisition number display 20SHK, etc.). Contains specific characters that form a specific area surrounded (for example, the characters used in the win number display 20SHK and the result display 20SHRE include specific characters that form a specific area surrounded by lines forming the characters) etc.), the specific character used for the display of the amount to be given is such that the first background image and the specific suggestive image cannot be visually recognized from the specific area (for example, the specific character used for the acquisition number display 20 SHK is the specific area The background image during the big hit and the effect image 20 SHRE of the notice of the reservation inside Renso are not visible from the background image, etc.), and the specific characters used for the result notification display are the second background image that is visible from the specific area. (For example, the specific characters used in the result display 20SHRE are such that the ending background image is visible from the specific area 20SHI5).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display the application amount display including the specific characters in relation to the first background image and the specific suggestive image, and display the result notification including the specific characters in conjunction with the second background image. It can be conveniently displayed in relation. For example, when a player confirms the amount of gaming value that has been granted in an advantageous state, the player confirms the display of the amount to be awarded. Since it may overlap with the suggestive video, if the first background video or the specific suggestive video is visible from the specific area of the specific character, the specific character may appear to be different from the original character. By making it impossible to visually recognize the background image and the specific suggestive image during the big win from the specific area, the specific character can be accurately recognized. On the other hand, the result notification display is displayed in large size characters in the wide first display area and does not overlap with the specific suggestive video, so by making the second background video visible from the specific area of the specific characters, It is possible to show the second background image even a little in the conspicuous display position of the first display area.

(18) In the gaming machine of (17) above, a setting means (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a jackpot winning probability any one of a plurality of different setting values "1" to "6" can be set), and the display means indicates the setting value set by the setting means (for example, the image display device 5 can display the ending background video in a manner suggesting the set value), and the specific suggestion video is It is one aspect of a plurality of types of suggestive images that suggest the advantageous state, and does not suggest the set value set by the setting means (for example, the effect image 20 SHRE of the pending notice is a predictor of the reliability of the big hit. Although it is one of a plurality of types of advance notice effects, the setting suggesting effect due to the pending advance notice is not executed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, there is a possibility that the setting value is suggested by the second background image, so it is significant that the second background image can be visually recognized from the specific area of the specific character used for the result notification display. increases.

(19) In the gaming machine of (17) or (18) above, the display means starts displaying the second background image with a predetermined brightness (for example, the image display device 5 displays the ending background image with a predetermined brightness). at the timing of starting the display of the result notification display, the second background image is paused and displayed at a specific brightness darker than the predetermined brightness, and the specific brightness is displayed. Display the result notification display with a brightness brighter than the brightness (for example, the image display device 5 temporarily suspends the ending background image with a specific brightness darker than a predetermined brightness at the timing T3 when the display of the result display 20SHRE is started. and displaying the result display 20 SHRE with brightness brighter than a specific brightness, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the visibility of the result notification display.

(Description on Characteristic Portion 19SH)
Next, a game machine related to the characteristic portion 19SH will be described with reference to FIGS. 42-1 to 42-6. The image display device 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 19SH displays the winning number of the number of prize balls given when the game ball enters the big winning opening in the big win game state, and is scheduled to be given in the big win game state. and a display of the number of expected winning balls related to the total number of prize balls. Further, the image display device 5 can display an effect display that makes the display of the expected number of winnings invisible or difficult when an over-winning occurs. Then, the image display device 5 updates the value of the expected acquisition number display when the expected acquisition number display becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 starts the over winning effect before the display of the expected winning number becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display.

Hereinafter, the pachinko game machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 19SH having such characteristics will be described. Note that the description of the same parts as those described above will be omitted.

(Production action when winning occurs during round game)
FIG. 42-1 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when winning occurs during a round game. FIG. 42-2 is a diagram showing an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed.

The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42-1(A), when it is controlled in the big win game state, the winning number display is 20SHK, and the game ball is in the big win game state in the big win game state. A winning number display 20SHK1 relating to the number of prize balls given by entering the , and a scheduled winning number display 20SHK2 relating to the total number of prize balls to be given in the jackpot game state are displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 42-1(A), the acquisition number display 20SHK is separated by a central parenthesis "/" like "135/1500", and the acquisition number display 20SHK1 with "135" in the numerator. 20SHK2 is arranged and is displayed in a fractional format, with the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 with "1500" in the denominator. 42-1(A), the winning number display 20SHK shown in FIG. 42-1(A) indicates that 135 balls are given as the game balls enter the big winning opening in the big win game state, and are given in the big win game state. This indicates that the total number of prize balls to be played is 1500.

Also in this embodiment, the winning number display 20SHK is displayed in the second display area 20SH52 of the image display device 5. In the second display area 20SH52, the big win display 20SHO, the decoration pattern display 20SHZ, and the round number display 20SHR are displayed. , a right-handed display 20SHM is also displayed. In addition, on the image display device 5, a background image during the big win in which the character 20SHCA appears is displayed corresponding to the progress of the round game in the big win game state. It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 42-2, the background image during the big win is displayed on the display layer arranged behind the display layer on which the winning number display 20SHK is displayed.

When the game ball enters the big winning hole in the jackpot game state and the prize ball is provided, the effect control CPU 120 displays the winning number in the effect mode as shown in FIGS. Update the value of 20SHK.

When a game ball enters the big winning hole in the jackpot game state and a prize ball is given, the effect control CPU 120 first, as shown in FIG. In the display area near the position of the variable winning ball device 7, the display of the effect display is started. Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 is arranged at the lower right position of the image display device 5 as seen from the player. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 42-1(B), the effect display 20SHEF imitating a tornado is displayed at the lower right corner of the display area of the image display device 5 . At this timing, the acquired number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquired number display 20SHK is not updated.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF toward the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 42-1(C). In the example shown in FIG. 42-1(C), since the acquisition number display 20SHK is displayed above the display area of the image display device 5, the effect display 20SHEF that started to be displayed is displayed at the lower right corner of the display area. moving upwards in the area. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 42-1(C), the size of the effect display 20SHEF increases as it moves. Also at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is not updated.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 42-1(D). Here, as shown in FIG. 42-2, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed on a display layer arranged in front of the display layer on which the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed. Therefore, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, the acquired number display 20SHK becomes invisible. At this timing, the acquired number display 20SHK cannot be visually recognized, but as shown in FIG. 42-2(D), the value of the acquired number display 20SHK is not updated.

In the example shown in FIG. 42-1(D), the effect display 20SHEF is moved to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, so that the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes invisible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is recognized. As long as it is impossible to do so, a part of the acquired number display 20SHK may be visible. That is, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, the acquisition number display 20SHK may be made difficult to see.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect display 20SHEF in the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, as shown in FIGS. 42-1(D) to (E) and FIGS. Thus, when the acquired number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult to see, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated. Here, in this embodiment, as described above, when game balls enter the big winning hole, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls. Therefore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 42-1(D) to (E) and FIGS. 42-2(D) to (E), the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" to "150".

Then, the effect control CPU 120 ends the display of the effect display 20SHEF, as shown in FIG. 42-1(F). In the example shown in FIG. 42-1(F), after the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends, the acquired number display 20SHK becomes visible, and it is possible to confirm that the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 has been updated. can.

According to such an effect mode, first, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed, so that the attention can be drawn to the effect display 20SHEF. As the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, attention to the acquired number display 20SHK can be increased. Then, by updating the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 when the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF, the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends and the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes visible. When it becomes , it is possible to appropriately recognize that the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1, which has been focused on, has been updated.

(Example of production operation when over winning occurs)
FIG. 42-3 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when over winning occurs. FIG. 42-4 is a diagram showing an example of the positional relationship of a plurality of display layers on which various displays are displayed.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is controlled so that the big winning hole is closed when the tenth game ball enters the big winning hole in one round game. A so-called over winning may occur in which the 1st game ball enters the big winning hole following the 10th game ball. When over-winning occurs, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the winning number display 20SHK in the effect mode as shown in FIG. 42-3.

When over winning occurs, the effect control CPU 120 first forms a large winning opening, as shown in FIGS. Effect display is started in a display area close to the position of the special variable winning ball device 7. In the example shown in FIG. 42-3(B), an effect display 20SHEF simulating a tornado is displayed at the lower right corner of the display area of the image display device 5 . At this timing, the acquired number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquired number display 20SHK is not updated.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF toward the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 42-3(C). In the example shown in FIG. 42-3(C), since the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed above the display area of the image display device 5, the effect display 20SHEF that started to be displayed is displayed at the lower right corner of the display area. moving upwards in the area. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 42-3(C), the size of the effect display 20SHEF increases as it moves. Also at this timing, the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is not updated.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. Before it becomes invisible or difficult, an over-winning presentation is started for notifying that an over-winning has occurred. In the example shown in FIG. 42-3(C), the image display device 5 displays an over winning effect image in which the character CHCB appears.

Note that the effect control CPU 120 can execute an effect by another effect device as an over winning effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 42-3(C), the effect control CPU 120 outputs, as an over-winning effect, an over-winning sound different from the normal winning sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. In the example shown in FIG. 42-3(C), the over-winning sound of "picon picon" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, the effect control CPU 120 may cause the attacker lamp 9c to emit light in a light emission mode different from the normal winning sound as an over winning effect.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, as shown in FIG. 42-3(D). Here, as shown in FIG. 42-4, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed on the display layer arranged in front of the display layer on which the acquired number display 20SHK is displayed. Therefore, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, the acquired number display 20SHK becomes invisible. At this timing, the acquired number display 20SHK cannot be visually recognized, but as shown in FIG. 42-4(D), the value of the acquired number display 20SHK is not updated.

In the example shown in FIG. 42-3(D), by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, the acquisition number display 20SHK becomes invisible, but the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK is recognized. As long as it is impossible to do so, a part of the acquired number display 20SHK may be visible. That is, by moving the effect display 20SHEF to the display area of the acquisition number display 20SHK, the acquisition number display 20SHK may be made difficult to see.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect display 20SHEF in the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, as shown in FIGS. 42-3(D) to (E) and FIGS. Thus, when the acquisition number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult to see, the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are updated. In the examples shown in FIGS. 42-3(D) to (E) and FIGS. 42-4(D) to (E), the value of acquisition number display 20SHK1 is updated from "150" to "165", and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated from "1500" to "1515".

Then, the effect control CPU 120 ends the display of the effect display 20SHEF, as shown in FIG. 42-3(F). In the example shown in FIG. 42-3(F), the acquisition number display 20SHK is visible after the effect display 20SHEF is displayed, and the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 have been updated. can be confirmed.

According to such an effect mode, first, the effect display 20SHEF is displayed, so that the attention can be drawn to the effect display 20SHEF. As the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area of the acquired number display 20SHK, attention to the acquired number display 20SHK can be increased. Then, when the acquisition number display 20SHK is invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF, the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are updated. When the display 20SHK becomes visible, it is possible to suitably recognize that the values of the obtained number display 20SHK1 and the expected number of obtained display 20SHK2, which have been focused on, have been updated.

In particular, when over winning occurs, not only the value of the winning number display 20SHK1 but also the value of the expected winning number display 20SHK2 is updated, so that the total number of prize balls to be given in the jackpot game state is given due to the over winning. It is possible to appropriately recognize that the number of winning balls has been increased by the number of winning balls.

After ending the display of the effect display 20SHEF, the effect control CPU 120 ends the over winning effect as shown in FIG. 42-3(G). In the example shown in FIG. 42-3(G), the display of the over-win effect image displayed on the image display device 5 as the over-win effect is ended, and the background image during the big win in which the character 20SHCA appears is displayed.

(Suggestion of setting by over-winning performance)
As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured so that the probability of winning a big hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing shown in FIG. 36, the winning probability of the big hit is changed by using the display result determination table according to the set value. The setting value consists of 6 stages from "1" to "6", "1" has the lowest ball rate, and "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6". The higher the value, the higher the payout rate. That is, when "1" is set as the set value, the degree of advantage for the player is the lowest, and the value increases in the order of "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". Benefit increases step by step. In this embodiment, set values "1" to "3" are referred to as "low settings" and set values "4" to "6" are referred to as "high settings."

The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is configured to be able to change the set value, and is configured to be able to execute the above-described over winning effect as a setting suggestion effect for suggesting the set value. For example, when the setting value is low, the effect control CPU 120 displays an over winning effect image in which the character CHCB appears on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. An over-winning sound of "Picone" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. On the other hand, when the setting value is high, the effect control CPU 120 displays an over winning effect image in which the character CHCC appears on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. An over-winning sound of "People!" is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

It should be noted that the setting suggesting effect by the over winning effect may not definitely suggest whether the set value is low or high. For example, when the set value is set low, the over winning effect shown in FIG. 42-5(B) may be executed at a sufficiently low rate, or when the set value is set high. In addition, the over winning effect shown in FIG. 42-5(A) may be executed at a sufficiently low rate.

In addition, the over-winning effect may differ in the effect mode depending on whether the set value is "6", which is the highest advantage for the player, or when the set value is not "6". Also, the over-winning effect may be different in effect mode depending on whether the set value is an odd number or when the set value is an even number.

(If there are rounds where the predetermined number of prizes were not won and rounds where over-winnings occurred)
FIG. 41-6 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when there are rounds in which a predetermined number of prizes have not been won and rounds in which over prizes have been won in the characteristic portion 19SH.

As described above, the open state of the jackpot game state is continued until the timing when the predetermined period elapses or the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches the predetermined number, whichever is earlier. .

In the example shown in FIGS. 42-6 (A) to (B), in the round game of one round, although there were 9 prizes, before the number of game balls entering the big prize opening reached 10 After 29.5 seconds have passed, one round of the round game is finished, and a second round of the round game is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 42-6(B), the winning number display 20SHK of "135/1500" is displayed in response to the fact that nine prizes were won during one round of the round game. ing. In this example, it is assumed that the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which 10 rounds of round games are executed is 1,500.

In the round game of 2 rounds, the number of game balls entering the big winning hole reaches 10, the round game of 2 rounds is ended, and 10 prizes are won in the round game of 3 rounds. and That is, it is assumed that 300 prize balls are awarded in round games of the 2nd and 3rd rounds. In this case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" at the start of the second round to "435" as shown in FIG. 42-6(C).

Then, it is assumed that over-winning has occurred in the round game of three rounds. In that case, as shown in FIG. 42-6(D), the display of the effect display 20SHEF is started, and the over winning effect is executed while the effect display 20SHEF is moving.

Then, as shown in FIG. 42-6(E), the acquired number display 20SHK becomes invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF, but when the acquired number display 20SHK becomes invisible or difficult to see, the acquired number display 20SHK value is updated. Then, as shown in FIG. 42-6(F), when the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends, the acquired number display 20SHK becomes visible. In this example, the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 is updated from "435" to "450", and the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is updated from "1500" to "1515".

Then, in the 4th to 10th rounds of the round game, the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches 10 and the round game of each round is ended. In this case, the value of the win number display 20SHK1 is updated from "450" at the start of the 4th round to "1500" as shown in FIG. 42-6(G).

Then, when all 10 rounds of the round game are completed, the ending effect is executed as shown in FIG. is notified.

Here, in this example, the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which 10 rounds of round games are executed was 1500, but over winning occurred in 3 rounds of round games. The value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is "1515". However, since there were only 9 wins in one round of the round game, the final value of the winning number display 20SHK1 is not "1515" but "1500".

According to this embodiment, when there are rounds in which the predetermined number of prizes were not won and rounds in which over-winnings occurred, the value of the winning number display 20SHK1 becomes a value smaller than the value of the expected winning number display 20SHK2. , and the final winning number display 20SHK, it is easy to understand that there were rounds in which the predetermined number of prizes were not won, and there were rounds in which over winnings occurred.

FIG. 41-7 is a diagram showing another example of the performance operation when there are rounds in which the predetermined number of prizes were not won and rounds in which over-winnings occurred in the characteristic portion 19SH.

In the example shown in FIGS. 42-7 (A) to (B), in the round game of one round, although there were 9 prizes, the number of game balls entering the big prize opening reached 10. After 29.5 seconds have passed, one round of the round game is finished, and a second round of the round game is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 42-7(B), the winning number display 20SHK of "135/1500" is displayed in response to the fact that nine prizes were won during one round of the round game. ing. In this example, it is assumed that the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which 10 rounds of round games are executed is 1,500.

In the round game of 2 rounds, the number of game balls entering the big winning hole reaches 10, the round game of 2 rounds is ended, and 10 prizes are won in the round game of 3 rounds. and That is, it is assumed that 300 prize balls are awarded in round games of the 2nd and 3rd rounds. In this case, the value of the acquired number display 20SHK1 is updated from "135" at the start of the second round to "435" as shown in FIG. 42-7(C).

Then, it is assumed that over-winning has occurred in the round game of three rounds. In that case, as shown in FIG. 42-7(D), the display of the effect display 20SHEF is started, and the over winning effect is executed while the effect display 20SHEF is moving.

Then, as shown in FIG. 42-7(E), the acquired number display 20SHK becomes invisible or difficult to see due to the effect display 20SHEF, but when the acquired number display 20SHK becomes invisible or difficult to see, the acquired number display 20SHK1 value is updated. Then, as shown in FIG. 42-7(F), when the display of the effect display 20SHEF ends, the acquired number display 20SHK becomes visible. In this example, the value of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 is updated from "435" to "450", but the value of the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is not updated and remains "1500".

Then, in the 4th to 10th rounds of the round game, the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches 10 and the round game of each round is ended. In this case, the value of the win number display 20SHK1 is updated from "450" at the start of the 4th round to "1500" as shown in FIG. 42-7(G).

Then, when all 10 rounds of the round game are completed, the ending effect is executed as shown in FIG. is notified.

Here, in this example, the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state in which 10 rounds of the round game are executed is 1500, but over winning occurs in the 3 rounds of the round game. However, the value of the final expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 remains "1500". However, since there were only 9 wins in one round of the round game, the value of the final winning number display 20SHK1 is "1500".

According to such an embodiment, when there are rounds in which a predetermined number of prizes were not won and rounds in which over-winnings occurred, the values of the winning number display 20SHK1 and the expected winning number display 20SHK2 do not cause discomfort. be able to.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic portion 19SH can be controlled to the jackpot game state. The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5 . In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a special variable winning ball device 7 which can be changed between an open state in which game balls can easily win and a closed state in which game balls cannot or cannot win a prize. In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a CPU 103 capable of executing a round game of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 from the closed state to the open state and then to the closed state when being controlled to the jackpot game state. . In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 capable of executing an over-win effect when an over-win occurs in one round game. The image display device 5 displays the winning number display 20SHK1 related to the number of winning balls given by the game balls entering the special variable winning ball device 7, and the winning number display 20SHK1 relating to the total number of prize balls to be given in the jackpot game state. A planned number display 20SHK2 can be displayed. In addition, the image display device 5 can display an effect display 20SHEF that makes the expected winning number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult when an over-winning occurs. Further, the image display device 5 updates the value of the effect display 20SHEF when the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display 20SHEF. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 starts the over winning effect before the expected winning number display 20SHK2 becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display 20SHEF.

According to such a configuration, when the value of the expected number of acquisition display 20SHK2 is updated, a sense of incongruity is caused more than when the value of the expected number of acquisition display 20SHK2 is updated while the number of expected acquisition display 20SHK2 is visible. can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes speakers 8L and 8R. The effect control CPU 120 can execute the effect by the image display device 5 and the effect by the speakers 8L and 8R as the over winning effect.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the effect of the over-winning effect.

Further, as described above, when the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 7, the image display device 5 starts displaying the effect display 20SHEF in the display area close to the special variable winning ball device 7, and displays the effect display. 20SHEF is moved to make the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, the entry of the game ball into the special variable prize winning device 7 can be represented by the display effect on the image display device 5, and the amusement can be improved. In addition, the effect display 20SHEF makes not only the expected number of acquisition display 20SHK2 but also the number of acquisition display 20SHK1 invisible or difficult to see.

Further, as described above, the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are visible when the effect indicator 20SHEF is moving, and the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed. When the effect display 20SHEF reaches the area, it becomes invisible or difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, when the effect display 20SHEF approaches the display area where the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed, the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 automatically come into view. Therefore, attention can be drawn to the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 before the value is updated due to the attention on the effect display 20SHEF.

Also, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 starts the over winning effect before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the number of wins display 20SHK1 and the number of expected wins display 20SHK2 are displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in advance that an over-winning has occurred by executing the over-winning effect, so that it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the expected winning number display 20SHK2 is updated. It can be suppressed more effectively.

Further, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can set one of a plurality of types of setting values "1" to "6" with different jackpot winning probabilities. Then, the image display device 5 can execute the over-winning effect in a manner suggesting the set value.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase attention to the over winning effect.

Further, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 ends the over-winning effect after the effect display 20SHEF ends.

According to such a configuration, since the updated value of the expected winning number display 20SHK2 can be visually recognized while the over winning effect continues, a sense of discomfort caused by the updating of the expected winning number display 20SHK2 is made visible. can be suppressed more effectively.

(Modified example of characteristic portion 19SH)
The gaming machine relating to the characteristic portion 19SH is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

For example, when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes addition of an error detection code and processing for backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game, but also the state of the backup flag and error detection code. Even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, by executing such power supply stop processing, the CPU 103 can resume the game before the power failure after the power failure is restored. can continue.

On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 does not back up various data for proceeding with the effect. Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 cannot continue the effect based on the game information before the power failure after the power failure is restored.

For example, when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure during the round game, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the effect corresponding to the round game after the power is restored. In that case, the effect control CPU 120 does not display the acquired number display 20SHK1 and the planned acquired number display 20SHK2 in the round game after the restoration of power supply, or displays a specific number such as "????/????" The acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed without displaying the values. In addition, even if a prize is won in the round game after power failure is restored, the effect control CPU 120 does not display the effect display 20SHEF because the image display device 5 does not execute the effect corresponding to the round game. . On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the over winning effect by the image display device 5 if it can be specified that an over winning effect has occurred in one round of the round game after the restoration of power supply, and the speakers 8L, 8R. It is possible to execute an over winning effect by the attack lamp 9c. It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 can specify that an over-win has occurred, for example, by means of a effect control command that notifies that an over-win has occurred.

According to such a configuration, in a situation in which the values of the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 cannot be confirmed after the power is restored, the effect display 20SHEF is not displayed so as not to cause discomfort. On the other hand, if over-winning occurs, it is possible to notify that effect.

(Description of means related to characteristic portion 19SH)
(1) The gaming machine related to the characteristic part 19SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and the display Means (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 has an image display device 5, etc.), a variable that can be changed between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium cannot or is difficult to win Winning means (for example, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a special variable winning ball device 7 that can change between an open state in which game balls can easily win and a closed state in which game balls cannot or are difficult to win), Control means (for example, pachinko) capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning means is changed from the second state to the first state and then changed to the second state when being controlled to the advantageous state; The game machine 1 is provided with a CPU 103 capable of executing a round game of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 from the closed state to the open state and then to the closed state when being controlled to the jackpot game state) a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect when more than a predetermined number of game media wins the variable prize winning means in one of the round games (for example, the pachinko machine 1 can , including a production control CPU 120 capable of executing an over-winning effect when an over-winning occurs, etc.), and the display means is provided when the game medium wins the variable winning means It is possible to display (for example, the image display device 5 is , an acquisition number display 20SHK1 related to the number of prize balls given by the game balls entering the special variable winning ball device 7, and a scheduled acquisition number display 20SHK2 related to the total number of prize balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state. displayable, etc.), and when game media greater than the predetermined number win the variable winning means, it is possible to display a specific display that makes the second award amount display invisible or difficult (for example, The image display device 5 can display an effect display 20SHEF that makes the expected number of winning display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see when an over-winning occurs, etc.), and the second award display can be visually recognized by the specific display. When it becomes impossible or difficult, the value of the second application amount display is updated (for example, the image display device 5 updates the effect table (e.g. updating the value of the effect display 20SHEF when the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 is rendered invisible or difficult by the display 20SHEF), Start the specific effect before it becomes invisible or difficult (the effect control CPU 120 starts the over winning effect before the expected number of acquisition display 20SHK2 becomes invisible or difficult due to the effect display 20SHEF, etc.) , is characterized by

According to such a configuration, when the value of the display of the second application amount is updated, a sense of discomfort is caused more than when the value of the display of the second application amount is updated while the display of the second application amount is visible. can be suppressed.

(2) The game machine of (1) above includes audio output means (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 is provided with speakers 8L and 8R), and the specific effect execution means uses the specific effect as the specific effect. An effect by the display means and an effect by the audio output means can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute an effect by the image display device 5 and an effect by the speakers 8L and 8R as the over-winning effect. executable, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the production effect of the specific production.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, when the game medium wins the variable winning means, the display means starts displaying the specific display in a display area near the variable winning means. Then, the specific display is moved to make the first award amount display and the second award amount display invisible or difficult to see (for example, the image display device 5 is configured so that the game ball wins the special variable winning ball device 7). Then, the display of the effect display 20SHEF is started in the display area close to the special variable winning ball device 7, and the effect display 20SHEF is moved to make the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 invisible or difficult to see. etc.).

According to such a configuration, the entry of the game ball into the variable winning means can be represented by the display effect on the display means, and the amusement can be improved. In addition, the specific display makes not only the display of the second application amount but also the display of the first application amount invisible or difficult to see, so that it is possible to more effectively suppress the occurrence of discomfort.

(4) In the gaming machine of (3) above, the first given amount display and the second given amount display are visible when the specific display is moving, and the first given amount display and the second given amount display are visible when the specific display is moving. When the specific display reaches the display area where the second grant amount display is displayed, it becomes invisible or difficult to see (for example, the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 have the effect display 20SHEF moved. is visible at times, and becomes invisible or difficult to see when the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, when the specific display approaches the display area where the first application amount display and the second application amount display are displayed, the first application amount display and the second application amount display are naturally visible. Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to the first application amount display and the second application amount display in the state before the value is updated due to attention to the specific display.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4) above, the specific effect executing means may perform the above-described Start a specific effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 starts an over winning effect before the effect display 20SHEF reaches the display area where the acquisition number display 20SHK1 and the expected acquisition number display 20SHK2 are displayed) .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize in advance that the game media greater than the predetermined number have won the variable winning means by executing the specific effect, so that the display of the second award amount is updated. It is possible to more effectively suppress the feeling of discomfort that occurs when the device is used.

(6) In any one of the gaming machines (1) to (5) above, setting means (for example, pachinko game The machine 1 is capable of setting one of a plurality of types of setting values "1" to "6" with different jackpot winning probabilities, etc.), and the specific effect execution means is configured to perform the setting The specific effect can be executed in a manner suggesting the set value set by the means (for example, the image display device 5 can execute an over winning effect in a manner suggesting the set value). .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase attention to the specific effect.

(7) In the gaming machine of (5) above, the specific effect executing means ends the specific effect after the display of the specific display ends (for example, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the display of the effect display 20SHEF is (e.g., ending the over-winning effect after finishing).

According to such a configuration, since the updated value of the display of the second applied amount can be visually recognized while the specific effect is continuing, the sense of incongruity caused by the update of the display of the second applied amount can be eliminated. , can be suppressed more effectively.

(Another example of transition to a time-saving state)
In addition, in each characteristic portion and each modification described above, regarding the transition to the time saving state, the form of transitioning via the big hit state and the small hit state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 always operates is illustrated. , the invention is not limited thereto. For example, when a time-saving design is derived and displayed as a special design, it may be shifted to a time-saving state without operating the special variable winning ball device 7 .

In addition, as the above-described time-saving patterns, these time-saving patterns may be used as part of the winning design or may be used as part of the small winning design.

In addition, when performing the lottery processing related to the derivation display of the time saving pattern, the lottery may be executed using a special random number for the time saving pattern lottery in these lottery processing, or the lottery random number of the lost pattern and the big hit pattern The lottery may be performed using random numbers for other lotteries such as lottery random numbers for small winning symbols, random numbers for judging big win lottery, and lottery random numbers for falling lottery.

In addition, these time-saving patterns may be a plurality of types of patterns, and may be used in combination with other patterns such as a small winning pattern or a winning pattern. In addition, in this case, the presence or absence of transition to the time saving state may be determined according to the small winning pattern to be used together. However, when the time-saving pattern is won, the lottery for the presence or absence of transition to the time-saving state is not performed by lottery, and the number of times of time-saving is not drawn.

In addition, in the case of performing the lottery of the time-saving design, if the setting value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving design does not change according to the setting value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving design in all the setting values are the same. However, the lottery probability of these time-saving symbols may be a different probability between the first special figure and the second special figure.

In addition, regarding the timing of random number acquisition when drawing a lottery for the time saving pattern, even when using a dedicated random number or using another random number, the timing at the time of winning the starting port good.

In addition, regarding the winning of the time-saving design lottery, if a dedicated random number is used, the lottery result by the dedicated random number will be the winning value, and if a small-hit design random number is used for the time-saving design lottery, a specific small-hit design The random number is used as the winning value, and when the random number for the falling lottery determination value is used for the lottery of the time saving pattern, the random number for the falling lottery determination value can be used as the winning value, and the lottery using the structure, for example, the special variable winning ball A time-saving area may be provided inside the device 7, and the fact that the game ball passes through the time-saving area may be regarded as winning of the time-saving design.

When the time-saving pattern lottery is performed using a structure and the small winning pattern is used together with the time-saving pattern, the number of times of variable display of the time-saving state is not changed depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed.

In addition, regarding the winning in the case of lottery of time-saving patterns, if random numbers are used for the lottery of time-saving patterns, a specific random number will be the winning value. A jackpot pattern random number value can be used as a winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performances other than the big hit probability differ depending on the setting, so it is possible only if the setting value cannot be changed.

Moreover, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time saving pattern may be the timing after the big hit determination. Incidentally, the lottery for the time-saving symbol is not executed in the time-saving state or the high-probability state, but is executed only in the low-probability low-base state, regardless of which random number value is used for the lottery. However, when the time-saving pattern is derived and displayed in the state of the time-saving state, whether the number of times of time-saving is reset or whether the lottery is not performed may be determined for each game machine.

In addition, as for the number of times of time saving when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of times of time saving according to the winning value and each game state. Moreover, it is also possible to make the condition for providing time saving different for each time saving pattern.

Further, when the number of times of time saving is different according to the time saving pattern, it is possible to change the sorting lottery of the time saving pattern between the first special pattern and the second special pattern.

Further, even when the same time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times of time saving given may differ according to the game state at that time. However, it is required that it is predetermined for the game state.

In addition, the lottery result of "zero number of times of time saving" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving pattern in the low-probability low base state.

Also, the derivation lottery of the time saving end pattern may be executed, and the number of times of time saving may be the number of times until the time saving end pattern is derived and displayed after the start of time saving or until the big win pattern is derived and displayed. In other words, without setting the number of times of time saving, in principle, it may be unlimited.

In addition, the number of times of time saving and the provision conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving pattern and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of the big hit.

Further, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the timing to be controlled to the time saving state is the time when the pattern fixing time of the time saving pattern has passed. However, when a small winning pattern random number is used for the lottery of the time saving pattern, and when the small winning is won and shifts to the time saving state, the timing of controlling to the time saving state is the end of the small winning operation.

In addition, in the case of lottery using a structure, the timing to be controlled to the time-saving state is the timing at the end of the operation of the structure in the game state in which the structure is operated.

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to the high-probability low-base state over a predetermined number of variable display times after a big hit, the high-probability low-base state is in the high-probability low-base state when the amusement center opens, and the high-probability low base state is maintained a specified number of times. After the variable display is executed and finished, control may be performed to the time saving state.

In addition, when the time saving pattern is derived and displayed when the time saving limiter function is installed, the number of times of the time saving limiter is updated. Also, the design fixing time of the time saving pattern may be different from the design fixing time of the other patterns.

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frame 11 Main board 12 Effect control board 200 Payout device 202 First guide passage formation part 201 Ball tank formation part 203 First passage formation body 210 Terminal board 220 Cover bodies 271A to 271H Hole Part 314, 324, 334 Cover part 340 Ball stop member N1-6, 11-16 Screw member

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a starting region;
a storage section capable of storing game media;
a payout unit capable of paying out game media;
a guide passage forming portion having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage for guiding the game media in the storage portion to the payout portion;
a screw drop limiting portion provided to cover the upper side of the guide passage forming portion;
As a notification display for notifying that the amount of game media provided has reached a predetermined amount, a first notification display for notifying that a first predetermined amount has been reached and a second predetermined amount that is different from the first predetermined amount have been reached. A second notification display for notifying that, and a display means capable of displaying
A game can be played using the game medium paid out from the payout unit, and an effect can be executed based on the game medium entering the start area,
The screw drop-limiting portion prevents game media that have fallen on the screw drop-limiting portion from accumulating and the screw member that has dropped on the screw drop-limiting portion to fall to the guide passage forming portion. configured to be able to stay on the restriction part,
The character used for the notification display includes a specific character in which a specific area surrounded by lines forming the character is formed,
The specific character includes a character whose background image is not visible from the specific area and a character whose background image is visible,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images